You are on page 1of 782

Technical reference manual Line differential protection IED RED 670

Innovation

from

ABB

Document ID: 1MRK505132-UEN Issued: December 2007 Revision: D IED product version: 1.B

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................21
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................21 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................21 About the technical reference manual.........................................22 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................23 Introduction.............................................................................23 Principle of operation..............................................................23 Input and output signals.........................................................26 Function block........................................................................26 Setting parameters.................................................................26 Technical data........................................................................26 Intended audience.......................................................................27 Related documents......................................................................27 Revision notes.............................................................................28

Section 2

Local human-machine interface.....................................29


Human machine interface.................................................................29 Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................31 Introduction..................................................................................31 Design.........................................................................................31 Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................32 Introduction..................................................................................32 Design.........................................................................................32 Keypad.............................................................................................33 LED...................................................................................................35 Introduction..................................................................................35 Status indication LEDs................................................................35 Indication LEDs...........................................................................35 LHMI related functions......................................................................36 Introduction..................................................................................36 General setting parameters.........................................................36 Status indication LEDs................................................................37 Design....................................................................................37 Function block........................................................................37 Input and output signals.........................................................37 Indication LEDs...........................................................................38 Introduction.............................................................................38 Design....................................................................................38 Function block........................................................................45

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Table of contents

Input and output signals.........................................................45 Setting parameters.................................................................45

Section 3

Basic IED functions........................................................49


Analog inputs....................................................................................49 Introduction..................................................................................49 Principle of operation...................................................................49 Function block.............................................................................50 Setting parameters......................................................................50 Self supervision with internal event list.............................................57 Introduction..................................................................................57 Principle of operation...................................................................57 Internal signals.......................................................................59 Run-time model......................................................................60 Function block.............................................................................61 Output signals..............................................................................62 Setting parameters......................................................................62 Technical data.............................................................................62 Time synchronization........................................................................62 Introduction..................................................................................62 Principle of operation...................................................................62 General concepts...................................................................62 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................63 Synchronization alternatives..................................................65 Function block.............................................................................67 Output signals..............................................................................67 Setting parameters......................................................................67 Technical data.............................................................................70 Parameter setting groups.................................................................71 Introduction..................................................................................71 Principle of operation...................................................................71 Function block.............................................................................72 Input and output signals..............................................................72 Setting parameters......................................................................73 Test mode functionality.....................................................................74 Introduction..................................................................................74 Principle of operation...................................................................74 Function block.............................................................................75 Input and output signals..............................................................75 Setting parameters......................................................................76 IED identifiers...................................................................................76 Introduction..................................................................................76 Setting parameters......................................................................76 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................77

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Introduction..................................................................................77 Principle of operation...................................................................77 Function block.............................................................................77 Input and output signals..............................................................77 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................78 Introduction..................................................................................78 Principle of operation...................................................................78 Function block.............................................................................79 Input and output signals..............................................................79 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................80 Introduction..................................................................................80 Principle of operation...................................................................80 Function block.............................................................................80 Input and output signals..............................................................80 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................81 Introduction..................................................................................81 Principle of operation...................................................................81 Function block.............................................................................81 Input and output signals..............................................................82 Setting parameters......................................................................83 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................85 Introduction..................................................................................85 Principle of operation...................................................................85 Function block.............................................................................86 Input and output signals..............................................................86 Setting parameters......................................................................86

Section 4

Differential protection.....................................................89
Line differential protection................................................................89 Introduction..................................................................................90 Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)..........90 Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers (PDIF, 87LT).....................................................91 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection (MDIF)....................................................................................91 Principle of operation...................................................................92 Algorithm and logic.................................................................92 Time synchronization.............................................................98 Analog signal communication for line differential protection..............................................................................100 Binary signal transfer............................................................103 Function block...........................................................................103 Input and output signals............................................................106 Setting parameters....................................................................111

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................124 High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................125 Introduction................................................................................125 Principle of operation.................................................................125 Logic diagram.......................................................................125 Function block...........................................................................126 Input and output signals............................................................126 Setting parameters....................................................................127 Technical data...........................................................................127

Section 5

Distance protection ......................................................129


Distance protection zones (PDIS, 21)............................................129 Introduction................................................................................129 Principle of operation.................................................................130 Full scheme measurement...................................................130 Impedance characteristic.....................................................131 Minimum operating current...................................................135 Measuring principles............................................................136 Directional lines....................................................................138 Simplified logic diagrams......................................................140 Function block...........................................................................143 Input and output signals............................................................143 Setting parameters....................................................................144 Technical data...........................................................................145 Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21).....................146 Introduction................................................................................146 Principle of operation.................................................................147 Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................148 Phase-to-phase fault............................................................150 Three phase faults................................................................151 Load encroachment..............................................................152 Minimum operate currents....................................................155 Simplified logic diagrams......................................................156 Function block...........................................................................160 Input and output signals............................................................160 Setting parameters....................................................................161 Technical data...........................................................................162 Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)................................................162 Introduction................................................................................163 Principle of operation.................................................................163 Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................164 Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................164 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................165 Basic detection logic.............................................................165

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................167 Function block...........................................................................168 Input and output signals............................................................168 Setting parameters....................................................................169 Technical data...........................................................................170 Automatic switch onto fault logic (PSOF).......................................170 Introduction................................................................................171 Principle of operation.................................................................171 Function block...........................................................................172 Input and output signals............................................................172 Setting parameters....................................................................173 Technical data...........................................................................173

Section 6

Current protection.........................................................175
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................175 Introduction................................................................................175 Principle of operation.................................................................175 Function block...........................................................................176 Input and output signals............................................................176 Setting parameters....................................................................176 Technical data...........................................................................177 Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51_67)................177 Introduction................................................................................178 Principle of operation.................................................................178 Function block...........................................................................182 Input and output signals............................................................182 Setting parameters....................................................................184 Technical data...........................................................................190 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........191 Introduction................................................................................191 Principle of operation.................................................................191 Function block...........................................................................192 Input and output signals............................................................192 Setting parameters....................................................................192 Technical data...........................................................................193 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N).........193 Introduction................................................................................193 Principle of operation.................................................................194 Switch onto fault logic...........................................................197 Function block...........................................................................198 Input and output signals............................................................198 Setting parameters....................................................................199 Technical data...........................................................................206 Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)..........206

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................207 Principle of operation.................................................................207 Function block...........................................................................210 Input and output signals............................................................210 Setting parameters....................................................................210 Technical data...........................................................................211 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................211 Introduction................................................................................212 Principle of operation.................................................................212 Function block...........................................................................215 Input and output signals............................................................215 Setting parameters....................................................................216 Technical data...........................................................................217 Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB).....................................................217 Introduction................................................................................218 Principle of operation.................................................................218 Function block...........................................................................219 Input and output signals............................................................219 Setting parameters....................................................................219 Technical data...........................................................................219 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................220 Introduction................................................................................220 Principle of operation.................................................................220 Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................223 Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................223 Function block...........................................................................224 Input and output signals............................................................224 Setting parameters....................................................................224 Technical data...........................................................................225

Section 7

Voltage protection........................................................227
Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)...............................227 Introduction................................................................................227 Principle of operation.................................................................227 Measurement principle.........................................................228 Time delay............................................................................228 Blocking................................................................................231 Design..................................................................................233 Function block...........................................................................234 Input and output signals............................................................234 Setting parameters....................................................................235 Technical data...........................................................................237 Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59).................................238 Introduction................................................................................238

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................238 Measurement principle.........................................................239 Time delay............................................................................239 Blocking................................................................................243 Design..................................................................................244 Function block...........................................................................246 Input and output signals............................................................246 Setting parameters....................................................................247 Technical data...........................................................................249 Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)................250 Introduction................................................................................250 Principle of operation.................................................................250 Measurement principle.........................................................250 Time delay............................................................................251 Blocking................................................................................253 Design..................................................................................254 Function block...........................................................................255 Input and output signals............................................................255 Setting parameters....................................................................255 Technical data...........................................................................257 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................258 Introduction................................................................................258 Principle of operation.................................................................258 Measured voltage.................................................................261 Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................262 Cooling.................................................................................265 OEX protection function measurands...................................265 Overexcitation alarm............................................................266 Logic diagram.......................................................................266 Function block...........................................................................267 Input and output signals............................................................267 Setting parameters....................................................................267 Technical data...........................................................................268

Section 8

Frequency protection....................................................271
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................271 Introduction................................................................................271 Principle of operation.................................................................271 Measurement principle.........................................................272 Time delay............................................................................272 Voltage dependent time delay..............................................274 Blocking................................................................................275 Design..................................................................................276 Function block...........................................................................276

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Table of contents

Input and output signals............................................................277 Setting parameters....................................................................277 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................278 Introduction................................................................................278 Principle of operation.................................................................278 Measurement principle.........................................................279 Time delay............................................................................279 Blocking................................................................................281 Design..................................................................................281 Function block...........................................................................282 Input and output signals............................................................282 Setting parameters....................................................................283 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................283 Introduction................................................................................283 Principle of operation.................................................................284 Measurement principle.........................................................284 Time delay............................................................................284 Blocking................................................................................289 Design..................................................................................290 Function block...........................................................................291 Input and output signals............................................................291 Setting parameters....................................................................291 Technical data...........................................................................292

Section 9

Multipurpose protection................................................293
General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................293 Introduction................................................................................293 Principle of operation.................................................................294 Measured quantities within the function...............................294 Base quantities for GF function............................................296 Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................296 Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................301 Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................302 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................302 Logic diagram.......................................................................302 Function block...........................................................................307 Input and output signals............................................................307 Setting parameters....................................................................309 Technical data...........................................................................319

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................321


Current circuit supervision (RDIF)..................................................321 Introduction................................................................................321 Principle of operation.................................................................321

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................323 Input and output signals............................................................323 Setting parameters....................................................................323 Technical data...........................................................................324 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................324 Introduction................................................................................324 Principle of operation.................................................................325 Zero sequence ....................................................................325 Negative sequence...............................................................328 du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................328 Operation modes..................................................................329 Dead line detection...............................................................330 Function block...........................................................................330 Input and output signals............................................................330 Setting parameters....................................................................331 Technical data...........................................................................332

Section 11 Control..........................................................................333
Synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)...........................333 Introduction................................................................................333 Principle of operation.................................................................333 Basic functionality.................................................................333 Logic diagrams.....................................................................334 Function block...........................................................................340 Input and output signals............................................................341 Setting parameters....................................................................342 Technical data...........................................................................344 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................345 Introduction................................................................................345 Principle of operation.................................................................346 Logic Diagrams....................................................................346 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................346 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle ....................................................................................346 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............347 Long trip signal.....................................................................348 Time sequence diagrams.....................................................353 Function block...........................................................................356 Input and output signals............................................................356 Setting parameters....................................................................357 Technical data...........................................................................359 Apparatus control (APC).................................................................360 Introduction................................................................................360 Principle of operation.................................................................360

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Table of contents

Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................361 Introduction...........................................................................361 Principle of operation............................................................361 Function block......................................................................363 Input and output signals.......................................................363 Setting parameters...............................................................364 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............364 Introduction...........................................................................364 Principle of operation............................................................364 Function block......................................................................365 Input and output signals.......................................................366 Setting parameters...............................................................367 Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................367 Introduction...........................................................................367 Principle of operation............................................................367 Function block......................................................................373 Input and output signals.......................................................373 Setting parameters...............................................................374 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................375 Introduction...........................................................................375 Principle of operation............................................................375 Function block......................................................................379 Input and output signals.......................................................379 Setting parameters...............................................................380 Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................381 Introduction...........................................................................381 Principle of operation............................................................381 Function block......................................................................385 Input and output signals.......................................................385 Setting parameters...............................................................386 Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................386 Introduction...........................................................................386 Principle of operation............................................................387 Function block......................................................................389 Input and output signals.......................................................389 Setting parameters...............................................................390 Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................391 Introduction...........................................................................391 Principle of operation............................................................391 Function block......................................................................392 Input and output signals.......................................................392 Setting parameters...............................................................393 Interlocking.....................................................................................393

10

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................393 Principle of operation.................................................................393 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................396 Introduction...........................................................................396 Principle of operation............................................................396 Function block......................................................................397 Input and output signals.......................................................397 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................398 Introduction...........................................................................398 Function block......................................................................399 Logic diagram.......................................................................400 Input and output signals.......................................................405 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................407 Introduction...........................................................................407 Function block......................................................................408 Logic diagram.......................................................................409 Input and output signals.......................................................413 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................416 Introduction...........................................................................416 Function block......................................................................417 Logic diagram.......................................................................418 Input and output signals.......................................................421 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................423 Introduction...........................................................................423 Function block......................................................................423 Logic diagram.......................................................................424 Input and output signals.......................................................425 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............427 Introduction...........................................................................427 Function block......................................................................427 Logic diagram.......................................................................428 Input and output signals.......................................................429 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES).......................430 Introduction...........................................................................430 Function block......................................................................430 Logic diagram.......................................................................431 Input and output signals.......................................................431 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................431 Introduction...........................................................................431 Function block......................................................................432 Logic diagrams.....................................................................433 Input and output signals ......................................................440 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB diameter (BH).....................................443

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

11

Table of contents

Introduction...........................................................................443 Function blocks....................................................................444 Logic diagrams.....................................................................446 Input and output signals.......................................................453 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (GGIO).......................................................................458 Introduction................................................................................458 Principle of operation.................................................................458 Function block...........................................................................460 Input and output signals............................................................461 Setting parameters....................................................................462 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................463 Introduction................................................................................463 Principle of operation.................................................................463 Function block...........................................................................463 Input and output signals............................................................464 Setting parameters....................................................................464

Section 12 Scheme communication...............................................465


Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) .................................................................................................465 Introduction................................................................................465 Principle of operation.................................................................466 Blocking scheme..................................................................466 Permissive underreach scheme...........................................466 Permissive overreach scheme.............................................467 Unblocking scheme..............................................................467 Intertrip scheme....................................................................468 Simplified logic diagram.......................................................468 Function block...........................................................................470 Input and output signals............................................................470 Setting parameters....................................................................470 Technical data...........................................................................471 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)....................................................................471 Introduction................................................................................472 Principle of operation.................................................................472 Current reversal logic...........................................................472 Weak end infeed logic..........................................................473 Function block...........................................................................474 Input and output signals............................................................474 Setting parameters....................................................................475 Technical data...........................................................................475 Local acceleration logic (PLAL)......................................................476

12

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................476 Principle of operation.................................................................476 Zone extension.....................................................................476 Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................477 Function block...........................................................................478 Input and output signals............................................................478 Setting parameters....................................................................479 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).....................................................................................479 Introduction................................................................................480 Principle of operation.................................................................480 Blocking scheme..................................................................480 Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................481 Unblocking scheme..............................................................482 Function block...........................................................................483 Input and output signals............................................................484 Setting parameters....................................................................484 Technical data...........................................................................485 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................485 Introduction................................................................................485 Principle of operation.................................................................486 Directional comparison logic function...................................486 Fault current reversal logic...................................................486 Weak and infeed logic..........................................................486 Function block...........................................................................488 Input and output signals............................................................488 Setting parameters....................................................................488 Technical data...........................................................................489

Section 13 Logic.............................................................................491
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................491 Introduction................................................................................491 Principle of operation.................................................................491 Logic diagram.......................................................................493 Function block...........................................................................496 Input and output signals............................................................496 Setting parameters....................................................................497 Technical data...........................................................................497 Trip matrix logic (GGIO, 94X).........................................................497 Introduction................................................................................497 Principle of operation.................................................................498 Function block...........................................................................500 Input and output signals............................................................500

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

13

Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................501 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................502 Introduction................................................................................502 Inverter function block (INV)......................................................502 OR function block (OR).............................................................502 AND function block (AND).........................................................503 Timer function block (Timer)......................................................504 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................505 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................505 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................506 Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................506 Settable timer function block (TS).............................................507 Technical data...........................................................................508 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................508 Introduction................................................................................508 Principle of operation.................................................................508 Function block...........................................................................509 Input and output signals............................................................509 Setting parameters....................................................................509

Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................511
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................511 Introduction................................................................................512 Principle of operation.................................................................513 Measurement supervision....................................................513 Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................517 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................521 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)..............................................522 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................522 Function block...........................................................................522 Input and output signals............................................................523 Setting parameters....................................................................526 Technical data...........................................................................540 Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................540 Introduction................................................................................541 Principle of operation.................................................................541 Reporting..............................................................................541 Design..................................................................................541 Function block...........................................................................542 Input signals..............................................................................542 Setting parameters....................................................................542 Technical data...........................................................................542 Event function (EV).........................................................................543 Introduction................................................................................543

14

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................543 Function block...........................................................................545 Input and output signals............................................................545 Setting parameters....................................................................546 Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................548 Introduction................................................................................549 Principle of operation.................................................................549 Measuring Principle..............................................................550 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....551 The non-compensated impedance model............................554 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................554 Function block...........................................................................555 Input and output signals............................................................555 Setting parameters....................................................................555 Technical data...........................................................................556 Measured value expander block.....................................................557 Introduction................................................................................557 Principle of operation.................................................................557 Function block...........................................................................558 Input and output signals............................................................558 Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................558 Introduction................................................................................559 Principle of operation.................................................................559 Function block...........................................................................566 Input and output signals............................................................568 Setting parameters....................................................................570 Technical data...........................................................................585 Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................586 Introduction................................................................................586 Principle of operation.................................................................586 Function block...........................................................................587 Input signals..............................................................................587 Technical data...........................................................................587 Indications (RDRE).........................................................................587 Introduction................................................................................587 Principle of operation.................................................................588 Function block...........................................................................589 Input signals..............................................................................589 Technical data...........................................................................589 Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................589 Introduction................................................................................589 Principle of operation.................................................................590 Function block...........................................................................590

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

15

Table of contents

Input signals..............................................................................590 Technical data...........................................................................590 Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................591 Introduction................................................................................591 Principle of operation.................................................................591 Function block...........................................................................592 Input signals..............................................................................592 Technical data...........................................................................592 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................592 Introduction................................................................................592 Principle of operation.................................................................593 Memory and storage............................................................593 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................594 Function block...........................................................................595 Input and output signals............................................................595 Setting parameters....................................................................595 Technical data...........................................................................595

Section 15 Metering.......................................................................597
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................597 Introduction................................................................................597 Principle of operation.................................................................597 Function block...........................................................................599 Input and output signals............................................................599 Setting parameters....................................................................600 Technical data...........................................................................601

Section 16 Station communication.................................................603


Overview.........................................................................................603 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................603 Introduction................................................................................603 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................604 Introduction...........................................................................604 Principle of operation............................................................604 Function block......................................................................604 Input and output signals.......................................................604 Setting parameters...............................................................605 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................605 Introduction...........................................................................605 Principle of operation............................................................605 Function block......................................................................606 Input and output signals.......................................................606 Setting parameters...............................................................606 Technical data...........................................................................607

16

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

LON communication protocol.........................................................607 Introduction................................................................................607 Principle of operation.................................................................608 Setting parameters....................................................................625 Technical data...........................................................................626 SPA communication protocol.........................................................626 Introduction................................................................................626 Principle of operation.................................................................626 Communication ports...........................................................636 Design.......................................................................................636 Setting parameters....................................................................636 Technical data...........................................................................637 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................637 Introduction................................................................................637 Principle of operation.................................................................637 General.................................................................................637 Communication ports...........................................................647 Function block...........................................................................647 Input and output signals............................................................650 Setting parameters....................................................................654 Technical data...........................................................................658 Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................659 Introduction................................................................................659 Principle of operation.................................................................659 Function block...........................................................................660 Input and output signals............................................................660 Setting parameters....................................................................661 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................662 Introduction................................................................................662 Principle of operation.................................................................662 Design.......................................................................................662 General.................................................................................662 Function block...........................................................................663 Input and output signals............................................................663 Setting parameters....................................................................665

Section 17 Remote communication................................................667


Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................667 Introduction................................................................................667 Principle of operation.................................................................667 Function block...........................................................................668 Input and output signals............................................................669 Setting parameters....................................................................671

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

17

Table of contents

Section 18 Hardware......................................................................675
Overview.........................................................................................675 Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................675 Case from the rear side.............................................................677 Hardware modules.........................................................................680 Overview....................................................................................680 Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................681 Introduction...........................................................................681 Functionality.........................................................................681 Design..................................................................................681 Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................683 Introduction...........................................................................683 Functionality.........................................................................683 Design..................................................................................683 Power supply module (PSM).....................................................685 Introduction...........................................................................685 Design..................................................................................686 Technical data......................................................................686 Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................686 Introduction...........................................................................686 Functionality.........................................................................687 Block diagram.......................................................................688 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................688 Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................688 Introduction...........................................................................688 Design..................................................................................689 Technical data......................................................................689 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) .......................................................................................689 Introduction...........................................................................689 Design..................................................................................690 Binary input module (BIM).........................................................692 Introduction...........................................................................692 Design..................................................................................692 Technical data......................................................................695 Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................696 Introduction...........................................................................696 Design..................................................................................696 Technical data......................................................................698 Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................699 Introduction...........................................................................699 Design..................................................................................699 Technical data......................................................................700

18

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Table of contents

Line data communication module (LDCM)................................701 Introduction...........................................................................701 Design..................................................................................702 Technical data......................................................................703 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM) ...........................................................................703 Introduction...........................................................................703 Design..................................................................................703 Technical data......................................................................705 Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................705 Introduction...........................................................................705 Functionality.........................................................................705 Design..................................................................................705 Technical data......................................................................706 mA input module (MIM).............................................................707 Introduction...........................................................................707 Design..................................................................................707 Technical data......................................................................708 GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................709 Introduction...........................................................................709 Design..................................................................................709 Technical data......................................................................710 GPS antenna.............................................................................711 Introduction...........................................................................711 Design..................................................................................711 Technical data......................................................................712 Case dimensions............................................................................713 Case without rear cover.............................................................713 Case with rear cover..................................................................713 Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................715 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................716 Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................717 External resistor unit..................................................................718 Mounting alternatives.....................................................................719 Flush mounting..........................................................................719 Overview..............................................................................719 Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................720 19 panel rack mounting............................................................720 Overview..............................................................................720 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................721 Wall mounting............................................................................722 Overview..............................................................................722 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................722

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

19

Table of contents

How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................723 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................724 Overview..............................................................................724 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............724 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................724 Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................725 Overview..............................................................................725 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........726 Technical data................................................................................726 Enclosure...................................................................................726 Connection system....................................................................727 Influencing factors.....................................................................727 Type tests according to standard..............................................728

Section 19 Labels...........................................................................731
Different labels................................................................................731

Section 20 Connection diagrams...................................................735 Section 21 Time inverse characteristics.........................................749


Application......................................................................................749 Principle of operation......................................................................751 Mode of operation......................................................................751 Inverse characteristics....................................................................757

Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................771
Glossary.........................................................................................771

20

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 1 Introduction

Section 1

Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1
1.1.1

Introduction to the technical reference manual


About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application manual Technical reference manual Installation and commissioning manual Operators manual Engineering guide

en06000097.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

21

Section 1 Introduction

can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The IED 670 engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool.

1.1.2

About the technical reference manual


The technical reference manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine interface features are explained. The chapter Basic IED functions presents functions that are included in all IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode and other functions of a general nature. The chapter Differential protection describes the various differential functions as well as restricted earth fault protection. The chapter Distance protection describes the functions for distance zones with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power swing detection and similar. The chapter Current protection describes functions such as overcurrent protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance. The chapter Voltage protection describes functions like undervoltage and overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection. The chapter Frequency protection describes functions for overfrequency, underfrequency and rate of change of frequency. The chapter Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage. The chapter Secondary system supervision includes descriptions of functions like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The chapter Control describes the control functions. These are functions like the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are product specific. The chapter Scheme communication describes among others functions related to current reversal and weak end infeed logic. The chapter Logic describes trip logic and related functions. The chapter Monitoring describes measurement related functions used to provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like. The chapter Metering describes primarily Pulse counter logic. The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via GOOSE.

22

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 1 Introduction

The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components. The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

1.1.3

Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)


The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1

Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2

Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram. Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

23

Section 1 Introduction

Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3. Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 3.
BLKTR TEST TEST Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. STUL1N BLOCK-int. STUL2N BLOCK-int. STUL3N & & >1 & t & TRIP START STL1 STL2 STL3 & >1

BLOCK-int.

xx04000375.vsd

Figure 1:

Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.

24

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 1 Introduction

STCND & & & & & &

>1

STZMPP-cont.

STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont. STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. >1 STNDPE-cont.

1L1L2 1L2L3 1L3L1 1L1N 1L2N 1L3N

>1 1--VTSZ 1--BLOCK >1 & 1--STND BLK-cont.


xx04000376.vsd

Figure 2:

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont.

>1 & >1 & & & 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START

>1 >1

BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd

Figure 3:

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

25

Section 1 Introduction
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4

Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.
CAP531 Name Inputs
U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TUV1PH2PUVM TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd

IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node

Outputs

Diagram Number

Figure 4:

Example of a function block

1.1.3.5

Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.

1.1.3.6

Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.

26

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Intended audience


General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5

Related documents
Documents related to RED 670 Operators manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three phase tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single phase tripping arr. Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbars Configuration diagram B, Single breakers with single or double busbars Configuration diagram C, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. Configuration diagram D, Multi breakers such as 1 1/2 or ring busbar arr. Setting example 1, 230 kV Short cable line with 1 1/2 CB arr. Identity number 1MRK 505 133-UEN 1MRK 505 134-UEN 1MRK 505 132-UEN 1MRK 505 135-UEN 1MRK 505 164-BEN 1MRK 002 801-BA 1MRK 002 801-CA 1MRK 002 801-DA 1MRK 002 801-EA 1MRK 004 500-82 1MRK 004 500-83 1MRK 004 500-84 1MRK 004 500-85 1MRK 505 175-WEN

Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products

1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 065-UEN 1MRK 500 075-WEN 1MRK 500 077-WEN 1KHA001027UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179UEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

27

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.6 Revision notes


Revision D Description No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.

28

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Section 2

Local human-machine interface


About this chapter
This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface (LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.

2.1

Human machine interface


The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD has a four lines and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects. The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects. The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality: Status indication LEDs Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool Liquid crystal display (LCD) Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset An isolated RJ45 communication port

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

29

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Figure 5:

Small graphic HMI

Figure 6:

Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects

30

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

2.2
2.2.1

Small size graphic HMI


Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.

2.2.2

Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the small LHMI is shown in figure 7
1 2 3

en05000055.eps

Figure 7:

Small graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

31

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ 45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

2.3
2.3.1

Medium size graphic HMI


Introduction
The 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19 cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is required.

2.3.2

Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8

32

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

en05000056.eps

Figure 8:

Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

2.4

Keypad

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

33

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.

Figure 9:

The HMI keypad

The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1:
Key

HMI keys on the front of the IED


Function This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.

This key opens a breaker or disconnector.

The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.

This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.

Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.

The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

This key opens the reset screen.

The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.

The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode. Table continued on next page

34

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface


Key Function The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.

The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

2.5
2.5.1

LED
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.

2.5.2

Status indication LEDs


There are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is described in the table below.
LED Indication Green: Steady Flashing Dark Yellow: Steady Flashing Red: Steady Trip command issued Dist. rep. triggered Terminal in test mode In service Internal failure No power supply Information

2.5.3

Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals. There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen. They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

35

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow: Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed Differential protection trip SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer. The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.

2.6
2.6.1

LHMI related functions


Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with: function block LHMI (LocalHMISign) function block HLED (LEDMonitor) setting parameters

2.6.2

General setting parameters


Table 2:
Parameter Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat

General settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function


Range English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 Step 10 Default English 60 On Unit Min Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of autorepeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display

ContrastLevel

Table continued on next page

36

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface


Parameter DefaultScreen Password EvListSrtOrder Range 0-0 SimplePassw DOEG205.3-1 Latest on top Oldest on top Step 1 Default 0 SimplePassw Latest on top Unit Description Default screen Password type for authorization Sort order of event list

2.6.3
2.6.3.1

Status indication LEDs


Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMISign) controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are configured with the PCM 600 tool. See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.

2.6.3.2

Function block
LHMILocalHMI CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD en05000773.vsd

Figure 10:

LHMI function block

2.6.3.3

Input and output signals


Table 3:
Signal CLRLEDS

Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block


Description Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 4:
Signal HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD

Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block


Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

37

Section 2 Local human-machine interface 2.6.4


2.6.4.1

Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F).

2.6.4.2

Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes
Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is

38

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer to the Operators manual. From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
en05000506.vsd

Figure 11:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

39

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Activating signal

LED
en01000228.vsd

Figure 12:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 13:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated. Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

40

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Activating signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 14:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 15.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

41

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6

New disturbance

&

tRestart t

& 1 &

en01000237.vsd

Figure 15:

Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 16.
Activating signal To LED

AND tMax t

To disturbance length control

en05000507.vsd

Figure 16:

Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

42

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000239.vsd

Figure 17:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance t Restart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000240.vsd

Figure 18:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

43

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


en01000241.vsd

Figure 19:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.


Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset


en01000242.vsd

Figure 20:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

44

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface


2.6.4.3 Function block
HLEDLEDMonitor BLOCK RESET LEDTEST NEWIND ACK

en05000508.vsd

Figure 21:

HLED function block

2.6.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 5:
Signal BLOCK RESET LEDTEST

Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block


Description Input to block the operation of the LED-unit Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit Input for external LED test

Table 6:
Signal NEWIND ACK

Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block


Description A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

2.6.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax

General settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function


Range Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Unit s s Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1

SeqTypeLED1

Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

45

Section 2 Local human-machine interface


Parameter SeqTypeLED2 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 2

SeqTypeLED3

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 3

SeqTypeLED4

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 4

SeqTypeLED5

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 5

SeqTypeLED6

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 6

SeqTypeLED7

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 7

SeqTypeLED8

Follow-S

sequence type for LED 8

SeqTypeLED9

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 9

SeqTypeLED10

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 10

Table continued on next page

46

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface


Parameter SeqTypeLED11 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 11

SeqTypeLED12

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 12

SeqTypeLED13

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 13

SeqTypeLED14

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 14

SeqTypeLED15

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 15

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

47

48

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Section 3

Basic IED functions


About this chapter
This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

3.1
3.1.1

Analog inputs
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. It is necessary to define a reference PhaseAngleRef for correct calculation of phase angles. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).

3.1.2

Principle of operation
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are always supposed to be star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see figure 22

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

49

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse

Protected Object Line, transformer, etc


e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd

Figure 22:

Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ration of the main CTs and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.

3.1.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

3.1.4

Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef

General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function


Range 1 - 24 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation

50

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 9:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

General settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function


Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

51

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 CTStarPoint10

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec10 CTprim10 CTStarPoint11

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec11 CTprim11 CTStarPoint12

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec12 CTprim12

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

52

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 10:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

General settings for the ANALOGIN6I (TB40-) function


Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

53

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 11:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

General settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function


Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

54

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12

1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

A A V kV V kV V kV

Table 12:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

General settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function


Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

55

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Parameter CTStarPoint2 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

A A V kV V kV V kV

Table continued on next page

56

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Parameter VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Range 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Unit V kV V kV V kV Description Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

3.2
3.2.1

Self supervision with internal event list


Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

3.2.2

Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes: Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INTFAIL signal see figure 24 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 23

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

57

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 23:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

Figure 24:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.

Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. 58 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME.

3.2.2.1

Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The standard signals are listed in table 13. The hardware dependent internal signals are listed in table 14. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 15.
Table 13:
Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

Self-supervision's standard internal signals


Description Internal Fail status Internal Warning status CPU module Fail status CPU module Warning status Real Time Clock status Time Synchronization status Runtime Execution Error status IEC 61850 Error status SW Watchdog Error status LON/Mip Device Error status Runtime Application Error status Settings changed Setting groups changed Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

Table 14:
Card ADxx BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM

Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals


Name of signal ADxx BIM-Error BOM-Error IOM-Error MIM-Error LDCM-Error Description Analog In Module Error status Binary In Module Error status Binary Out Module Error status In/Out Module Error status Millampere Input Module Error status Line Differential Communication Error status

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

59

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 15:
Name of signal FAIL

Explanations of internal signals


Reasons for activation This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT-WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT-FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR, INT--TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT-RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock. This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc. This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state. This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any settings are changed. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed. This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.

WARNING

NUMFAIL

NUMWARNING RTCERROR TIMESYNCHERROR

RTEERROR

IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG

LMDERROR APPERROR

SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

3.2.2.2

Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure 25.

60

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 25:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.

The technique to split the analogue input signal into two converters with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higherADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

3.2.3

Function block
IS--InternalSignal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN T SYNCERR RT CERR en04000392.vsd

Figure 26:

IS function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

61

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.2.4 Output signals


Table 16:
Signal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block


Description Internal fail Internal warning CPU fail CPU warning Time synchronization status Real time clock status

3.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

3.2.6

Technical data
Table 17:
Data Recording manner List size

Self supervision with internal event list


Value Continuous, event controlled 1000 events, first in-first out

3.3
3.3.1

Time synchronization
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.

3.3.2
3.3.2.1

Principle of operation
General concepts Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock 62 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Syncronization from a higher level

Module

Optional syncronization of modules at a lower level

en05000206.vsd

Figure 27:

Synchronization principle

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of: The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

3.3.2.2

Real Time Clock (RTC) operation


The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.

RTC at power off

During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

63

Section 3 Basic IED functions


RTC at startup

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine: If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.

Rate accuracy

In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.

64

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions


3.3.2.3 Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103 session. The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GSM).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

65

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency. Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.

Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

a b

c
en05000251.vsd

Figure 28:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

66

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Example, binary synchronization A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes.

3.3.3

Function block
TIMETIME TSYNCERR RTCERR en05000425.vsd

Figure 29:

TIME function block

3.3.4

Output signals
Table 18:
Signal TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block


Description Time synchronization error Real time clock error

3.3.5
RED 670

Setting parameters
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 67

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Path in local HMI: Setting/Time Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization


Table 19:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc

Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function


Range Off SPA LON SNTP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization

TimeAdjustRate

Fast

Table 20:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc

Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function


Range Off SPA LON SNTP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization

TimeAdjustRate

Slow

68

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 21:
Parameter ModulePosition

General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function


Range 3 - 16 Step 1 Default 3 Unit Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection

BinaryInput

1 - 16

BinDetection

PositiveEdge NegativeEdge

PositiveEdge

Table 22:
Parameter ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add

General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function


Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Unit Description Server IP-address Redundant server IPaddress

Table 23:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function


Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default March Unit Description Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

69

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 24:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function


Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default October Unit Description Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends

Table 25:
Parameter NoHalfHourUTC

General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function


Range -24 - 24 Step 1 Default 0 Unit Description Number of half-hours from UTC

3.3.6

Technical data
Table 26:
Function Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, Sampled Measurement Values

Time synchronization, time tagging


Value 1 ms 1.0 ms typically

1.0 ms typically

70

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.4
3.4.1

Parameter setting groups


Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the humanmachine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.4.2

Principle of operation
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available. A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse with the length according to parameter t, which is set from PCM 600 or in the local HMI. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

71

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 30:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the PST setting tool.

3.4.3

Function block
ACGRActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 SETCHGD en05000433.vsd

Figure 31:

ACGR function block

SGC-NoOfSetGrp MAXSETGR en05000716.vsd

3.4.4
72

Input and output signals


Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 27:
Signal ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6

Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block


Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active Selects setting group 5 as active Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 28:
Signal GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD

Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block


Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active Pulse when setting changed

3.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 29:
Parameter t

General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function


Range 0.0 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit s Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed

Table 30:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp

General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function


Range SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Step Default SettingGroup1 Unit Description ActiveSettingGroup

MAXSETGR

No

Max number of setting groups 1-6

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

73

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.5
3.5.1

Test mode functionality


Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

3.5.2

Principle of operation
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode: By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST. By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 32. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.

74

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 32.

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 32:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.

3.5.3

Function block
TESTTest INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING en05000443.vsd

Figure 33:

TEST function block

3.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 31:
Signal INPUT

Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block


Description Sets terminal in test mode when active

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

75

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 32:
Signal ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING

Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block


Description Terminal in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)

3.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 33:
Parameter TestMode

General settings for the Test (TEST-) function


Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off)

3.6
3.6.1

IED identifiers
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually: ProductInformation function has only three pre-set, unchangeable but nevertheless very important settings: SerialNo., Ordering No., and ProductDate, that you can see on the local HMI, under Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers. They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance). Identifiers function is actually allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

3.6.2

Setting parameters
Table 34:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber

General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function


Range 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Unit Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number

76

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.7
3.7.1

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)


Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.7.2

Principle of operation
The SMBI function block, see figure 34, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.

3.7.3

Function block
SI01SMBI INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

en05000434.vsd

Figure 34:

SI function block

3.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 35:
Signal INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block


Description Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI5 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI6 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI7 in Signal Matrix Tool

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

77

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Signal BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME Description Signal name for BI8 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI9 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BI10 in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 36:
Signal BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block


Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10

3.8
3.8.1

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)


Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.

3.8.2

Principle of operation
The SMBO function block, see figure 35, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which it is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT.

78

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.8.3 Function block


SO01SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME BO8NAME BO9NAME BO10NAME en05000439.vsd

Figure 35:

SO function block

3.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 37:
Signal BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block


Description Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO6 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO8 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Single Matrix Tool

Table 38:
Signal INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME

Output signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block


Description Instance name in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO6 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Single Matrix Tool

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

79

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Signal BO8NAME BO9NAME BO10NAME Description Signal name for BO8 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Single Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Single Matrix Tool

3.9
3.9.1

Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)


Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.

3.9.2

Principle of operation
The SMMI function block, see figure 36, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the SPGGIO MVGGIO function block for further use of the mA signals.

3.9.3

Function block
SMI1SMMI INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

en05000440.vsd

Figure 36:

SMI function block

3.9.4

Input and output signals

80

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 39:
Signal INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME

Input signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block


Description Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for IN4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI5 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI6 in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 40:
Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block


Description Analog milliampere input 1 Analog milliampere input 2 Analog milliampere input 3 Analog milliampere input 4 Analog milliampere input 5 Analog milliampere input 6

3.10
3.10.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)


Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known) is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.10.2

Principle of operation
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 37 and figure 38. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the function block.

3.10.3

Function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

81

Section 3 Basic IED functions

PR01SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000705.vsd

Figure 37:
PR02SMAI BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE

PR01 function block

AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000706.vsd

Figure 38:

PR0212 function block

3.10.4

Input and output signals


Table 41:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME

Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block


Description Block group 1 Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group name for GRP1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI4 in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 42:
Signal SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1

Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block


Description Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input 1

Table continued on next page

82

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions


Signal AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN Description Group 1 analog input 2 Group 1 analog input 3 Group 1 analog input 4 Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 43:
Signal BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME

Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block


Description Block group 2 Group name for GRP2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for AI4 in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 44:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block


Description Group 2 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 1 Group 2 analog input 2 Group 2 analog input 3 Group 2 analog input 4 Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

3.10.5

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

83

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 45:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut

General settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function


Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType Negation

Ph-N Off

Input connection type Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage 1=Voltage,2=Current

UBase TYPE

0.05 - 2000.00 1-2

0.05 1

400.00 1

kV Ch

84

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 46:
Parameter DFTReference

General settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function


Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference

ConnectionType Negation

Ph-N Off

Input connection type Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base voltage 1=Voltage,2=Current

UBase TYPE

0.05 - 2000.00 1-2

0.05 1

400.00 1

kV Ch

3.11
3.11.1

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)


Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

3.11.2

Principle of operation
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see figure 39. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the function block.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

85

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.11.3 Function block


SU01Sum3Ph BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 en05000441.vsd

Figure 39:

SU function block

3.11.4

Input and output signals


Table 47:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P

Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block


Description Block Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 48:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4

Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block


Description Group analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input Group 2 analog input Group 3 analog input Group 4 analog input

3.11.5

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

86

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 49:
Parameter SummationType

General settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function


Range Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 (Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref 5 - 200 Step Default Group1+Group2 Unit Description Summation type

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

FreqMeasMinVal

10

Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage

UBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

kV

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

87

88

Section 4 Differential protection

Section 4

Differential protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.

4.1

Line differential protection


Function block name: L3D-ANSI number: 87L IEC 61850 logical node name: L3CPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3Id/I>

Function block name: L6D-ANSI number: 87L IEC 61850 logical node name: L6CPDIF

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3Id/I>

Function block name: LT3D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT3CPDIF

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3Id/I>

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

89

Section 4 Differential protection

Function block name: LT6D-ANSI number: 87LT IEC 61850 logical node name: LT6CPDIF

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3Id/I>

4.1.1
4.1.1.1

Introduction
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets (PDIF, 87L)
The line differential function compares the currents entering and leaving the protected overhead line or cable. It offers phase-segregated true current differential protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single-pole tripping. The three terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three terminal lines with single breaker arrangements at all terminals.
Protected zone

RED 670

Comm. Channel

RED 670 en05000039.vsd

Figure 40:

Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line

The six terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi terminal lines with up to five terminals.
Protected zone

RED 670

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

RED 670

Comm. Channel

RED 670

en05000040.vsd

Figure 41:

Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1 1/2 breaker arrangements

90

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The current differential algorithm in RED 670 provides high sensitivity for internal faults, at the same time as it has excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave mode) for evaluation. A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest phase current in any line end giving a secure through fault stability even with heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained high differential current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents. A special feature with RED 670 is that applications with small power transformers (rated current less than 50% of differential current setting) connected as line taps without measurement in the tap can be handled. The normal load current is here considered to be negligible, and special measures need only to be taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the tripping of the differential protection can be time delayed for low differential currents in order to achieve coordination with down stream over current relays. A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of the differential function.

4.1.1.2

Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone transformers (PDIF, 87LT)


One or two power transformers can be included in the line differential protection zone. Both two- and three-winding transformers are correctly represented with vector group compensations made in the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint and zero sequence current elimination.
Protected zone

RED 670

Comm. Channel

RED 670

Comm. Channel
RED 670

Comm. Channel

en05000042.vsd

Figure 42:

Example of application on a three-terminal line with a power transformer in the protection zone

4.1.1.3

Analog signal transfer for line differential protection (MDIF)


The line differential communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged between all terminals, and an evaluation is made in each terminal. This means that a

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

91

Section 4 Differential protection

64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals.
Protected zone

RED 670

RED 670

Comm. Channels

RED 670

RED 670

RED 670 en05000043.vsd

Figure 43:

Five terminal line with master-master system


Protected zone

RED 670

RED 670

Comm. Channels
RED 670 RED 670 RED 670 en05000044.vsd

Figure 44:

Five terminal line with master-slave system

Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly. In RED 670 it is possible to make this coordination in two different ways. The echo method of time synchronizing is normally used whereas for applications where transmit and receive times can differ, the optional built in GPS receivers shall be used. The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible after a preset time.

4.1.2
4.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Algorithm and logic
In the line differential function, measured current values from local and remote line ends are evaluated in order to distinguish between internal or external faults, or undisturbed conditions.

92

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The local currents are fed to the IED via the Analogue Input Modules and thereafter they pass the Analog to Digital Converter, see figure 45.

Figure 45:

The principle for the line differential function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

93

Section 4 Differential protection

The remote currents are received to the IED as samples via a communication link. When entering the IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication Module (LDCM) where they are time coordinated with the local current samples, and interpolated in order to be comparable with the local samples. In the Pre-Processing Block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency phase currents and negative sequence currents are derived. Together with the current samples, they are then forwarded to the differential function block where three different analyses are carried out. The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the characteristic as seen in figure 46. The line differential function is phase segregated where the differential current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken separately for each phase. The bias current, on the other hand, is considered as the greatest phase current in any line end and it is common for all three phases. The two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2) can be set in the PCM 600 tool or via the HMI. Current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope will give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to temporarily decrease the sensitivity in situations when: the line is energized when a fault is classified as external when a tap transformer is switched in

There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.

94

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Operate current [ in pu of IBase] 5

Operate unconditionally UnrestrainedLimit

3 A 2 Section 1

Operate conditionally

IdMinHigh B

Section 2

Section 3 SlopeSection3

1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 EndSection1 EndSection2 1 2 3

Restrain 4 5

Restrain current [ in pu of IBase]

en05000300.vsd

Figure 46:
where:

Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics

slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain


and where the restrained characteristic is defined by the settings:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

IdMin EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3

The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis on the differential current. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one will block tripping action from the biased slope evaluation. The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. It works such RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 95

Section 4 Differential protection

that the phase angle of the negative sequence current from the local end is compared with the phase angle of the sum of the negative sequence currents from the remote ends. The characteristic for this fault discriminator is shown in figure 47, where the directional characteristic is defined by the two setting parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.
90 deg 120 deg If one or the other of currents is too low, then no measurement is done, and 120 degrees is mapped Internal/external fault boundary

NegSeqROA (Relay Operate Angle)

180 deg

0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External fault region

Internal fault region

270 deg
en05000188.vsd

Figure 47:

Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

Reference direction of currents is considered to be towards the line. Thus, when both currents to be compared have this direction, the phase difference between them will ideally be zero. In the opposite case, when one current is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be 180 degree. In case either the local or the sum of the remote negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator will not make any fault classification and the value 120 degree is set. This value is then an indication that negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible to make, and it does not mean classification as external fault. When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a trip is issued under the condition that the dual slope restrained function has started, whilst a classification as external fault results in an increase of the restrained characteristic trip values IdMinHigh. With reference to figure 45, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the output logic. Figure 48 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where only trip commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.

96

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 48:

Simplified block diagram

Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope in figure 47 are said to give a start, the output logic can be summarized as follows: A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of 2nd and 5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However, when a line is energized

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

97

Section 4 Differential protection

the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means that the line A-B-C in figure 46 forms the characteristic. Current values above the unrestrained limit gives a trip irrespective of any presence of harmonics. Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, will give a trip under the condition that a start has occurred in that phase. This means that any harmonic blocking is then overridden. However, occurrence of harmonics at the same time as the differential current is below the level IdMinHigh, will block a trip even though the fault is classified as internal. This latter condition is to prevent unwanted trips when energizing a line tap transformer. Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator will cause IdMinHigh to be used as the lower limit for the restrained characteristic according to figure 46. Cross blocking will also be activated in this situation.

Compensation for charging currents can be selected active or not by setting ChargCurEnableYes or No. The compensation works such that the fundamental frequency differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed conditions, is identified and then subtracted making the resulting differential current zero (or close to zero). This action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents in Amperes can be read at any time as the service value ICHARGE. Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance conditions. The updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal conditions are only considered if there are no start signals, neither internal nor external fault is declared, the power system is symmetrical, etc. It is thus obvious that the change in charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system voltage is not considered in the algorithm, a matter that is further discussed in the Application Manual for RED670. It shall be noted that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, no matter what their origin. Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated: Small differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current transformers. Small differential currents because of off-nominal On-Load-Tap-Changer positions when a power transformer is included in the protected zone. Load currents of tap loads included in the protected zone.

4.1.2.2

Time synchronization
In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents from the different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors. Accuracy requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.

98

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude error approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum amplitude error of approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4% and 38% respectively. In RED670 the time coordination is made with the so-called echo method, which can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option. Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes time tagging of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time difference between the clocks in two ends of a power line. Referring to figure 49, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from station B to station A (T1 T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 T4) is measured. The time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of station A, and the time instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of station B.

A B T1

T2

T3

T4
en05000293.vsd

Figure 49:

Measuring time differences

Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference t between the clocks in A and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are only valid under the condition that the send and receive times are equal.
Td = (T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 ) 2 (T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 ) 2

(Equation 2)

Dt =

(Equation 3)

In RED 670 t is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used to adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the current differential algorithm is executed. The echo method without GPS, can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with varying signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry i.e. the send and receive delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going different routes in the network from time to other.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

99

Section 4 Differential protection

When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for t given above is no longer valid, and GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used. Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each IED, synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in the order of 1 s, all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock reference. It is then possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and compensate for it. When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides the GPS receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of the GPS time synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS synchronization. Especially short interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals are handled securely in this way. When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to freewheeling during 8 seconds i.e. during this time the synchronization benefits from the stability in the local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds, either fall back to the echo synchronization method or blocking of the line differential function is made, as selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr. For a description of the time synchronization function, refer to section "Time synchronization".

4.1.2.3

Analog signal communication for line differential protection Communication principle


For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated over a 64 kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current communicated back on the same channel. In case of e.g. a three terminal line another 64 kbit/s channel will be needed to exchange the same local current with the third line end current, etc. In one-and-a-half breaker arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two 64 kbit/s channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add together the two local currents before sending them and in that way reduce the number of communication channels needed. This is achieved by selecting proper setting for parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However, by doing it this way there will be reduced information about bias currents. For further information and discussions on this matter, refer to the Application manual for RED670. The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively. Figure 50 shows a master-master system for a five-terminal line. Here current samples are exchanged between all terminals, and an evaluation is made in each terminal. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone.

100

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Protected zone

RED 670 Comm. Channels

RED 670

RED 670

RED 670

RED 670
en05000292.vsd

Figure 50:

5terminal line with master-master system

In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave terminals as shown in figure 51.
Protected zone

RED 670

RED 670

Comm. Channels RED 670 RED 670 RED 670

en05000291.vsd

Figure 51:

5terminal line with master-slave system

The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the slaves to Off for the line differential function, and setting parameter ChannelMode to On for the LDCMs in the slaves.

Test mode

The line differential function in one IED can be set in test mode. This will block the trip outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, such that injected currents will be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable amplitude. The trip outputs in the remote terminals will also be blocked automatically. For further information on this, refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for RED670.

Communication of current sampled values

The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection terminals, but the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means that at in each telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6 RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 101

Section 4 Differential protection

consecutive current samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant) are included. Figure 52 shows the principle.
Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent Current sample telegram sent

10

15

20

25

30

35

Time (ms)
en05000290.vsd

Figure 52:
where: x

Communication of current sampled values.

is the current sampling moment

With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 53, both channels are in operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.

Redundant communication channels

Telecom. Network
LD CM LD CM LD CM LD CM

Telecom. Network

Primary channel Secondary redundant channel


Figure 53:

en05000289.vsd

Direct fibre optical connection between two terminals with LDOM over longer distances.

In case communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel is made after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will cause a switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime. For a three-, four- or five terminal line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one communication channel will not cause the line differential protection to be unserviceable. Instead it will automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with 102 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

the two IEDs that have an unserviceable communication link between them, will serve as slaves. For more details about the remote communication see Chapter "Remote communication". See also the Application manual.

4.1.2.4

Binary signal transfer


There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line differential analog communication. For further information about this, refer to section "Binary signal transfer to remote end".

4.1.3

Function block
L3D-L3CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE

en05000667.vsd

Figure 54:

L3D function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

103

Section 4 Differential protection

L6D-L6CPDIF I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE

en05000666.vsd

Figure 55:

L6D function block

104

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

LT3DLT3CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000254.vsd

Figure 56:

LT3D function block

LT6DLT6CPDIF_87LT I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6 TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 ALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000255.vsd

Figure 57:

LT6D function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

105

Section 4 Differential protection

LDL-LineDiffLogic CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD en05000394.vsd

Figure 58:

LDL function block

4.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 50:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3

Input signals for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function block


Description Group signal for three phase current channel 1 Group signal for three phase current channel 2 Group signal for three phase current channel 3

Table 51:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2

Output signals for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function block


Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2

Table continued on next page

106

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Signal BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE Description Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 Angle between local and remote neg. seq. currents Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L3 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L3 Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Amount of compensated charging current

Table 52:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6

Input signals for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function block


Description Group signal for three phase current channel 1 Group signal for three phase current channel 2 Group signal for three phase current channel 3 Group signal for three phase current channel 4 Group signal for three phase current channel 5 Group signal for three phase current channel 6

Table 53:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START

Output signals for the L6CPDIF_87L (L6D--) function block


Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

107

Section 4 Differential protection


Signal STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE Description Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 Angle between local and remote neg. seq. currents Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L3 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L3 Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Amount of compensated charging current

Table 54:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3

Input signals for the LT3CPDIF_87L (LT3D-) function block


Description Group signal for three phase current channel 1 Group signal for three phase current channel 2 Group signal for three phase current channel 3

108

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 55:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3 ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE

Output signals for the LT3CPDIF_87L (LT3D-) function block


Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 Angle between local and remote neg. seq. currents Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L3 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L3 Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Amount of compensated charging current

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

109

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 56:
Signal I3P1 I3P2 I3P3 I3P4 I3P5 I3P6

Input signals for the LT6CPDIF_87L (LT6D-) function block


Description Group signal for three phase current channel 1 Group signal for three phase current channel 2 Group signal for three phase current channel 3 Group signal for three phase current channel 4 Group signal for three phase current channel 5 Group signal for three phase current channel 6

Table 57:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRIPENHA START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 NSANGLE IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG ID2HL1 ID2HL2 ID2HL3

Output signals for the LT6CPDIF_87L (LT6D-) function block


Description Common, main, trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip by restrained differential protection Trip by unrestrained differential protection Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection Common, main, start output signal Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3 Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2 Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3 Angle between local and remote neg. seq. currents Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2 Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3 Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 2nd harm. diff. current, phase L3

Table continued on next page

110

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Signal ID5HL1 ID5HL2 ID5HL3 IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 ICHARGE Description Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of the 5th harm. diff. current, phase L3 Instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Amount of compensated charging current

Table 58:
Signal CTFAIL OUTSERV BLOCK

Input signals for the LineDiffLogic (LDL--) function block


Description CT failure indication from local CT supervision Input for indicating that the terminal is out of service Block of function

Table 59:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRLOCAL TRLOCL1 TRLOCL2 TRLOCL3 TRREMOTE DIFLBLKD

Output signals for the LDLPDIF_87L (LDL--) function block


Description General trip from differential protection system Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip from local differential function Trip from local differential function in phase L1 Trip from local differential function in phase L2 Trip from local differential function in phase L3 Trip from remote differential function Local line differential function blocked

4.1.5

Setting parameters

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

111

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 60:
Parameter NoOfTerminals

General settings for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function


Range 2 3 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection On/Off for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr

Chan2IsLocal

No

IBase

0.1

3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr

Off On

Off

Table 61:
Parameter Operation IdMin

Parameter group settings for the L3CPDIF_87L (L3D--) function


Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.50 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase On/Off selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

0.01

1.25

IB

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

IdMinHigh

0.20 - 10.00

0.01

1.00

IB

IntervIdMinHig

0.250 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

NegSeqDiff

Off On 30.0 - 120.0

On

NegSeqROA

1.0

60.0

Deg

Table continued on next page

112

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter IMinNegSeq Range 0.01 - 0.20 Step 0.01 Default 0.04 Unit IB Description Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase On/Off selection of the cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % On/Off selection for compensation of charging currents On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.

CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio

No Yes 5.0 - 100.0

1.0

No 10.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

ChargCurEnable

Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00

Off

AddDelay

Off

IMaxAddDelay

0.01

1.00

IB

DefDelay

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

0.000

IDMTtMin

0.001 - 6.000

0.001

0.010

CurveType

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10

IEC Def. Time

0.01

1.00

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.02

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

113

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter a Range 0.01 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.14 Unit Description Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

Table 62:
Parameter NoOfTerminals

General settings for the L6CPDIF (L6D--) function


Range 2 3 4 5 6 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit. Minimum is 2, maximum is 6. Protection terminals can be less than number of current terminals. 2nd current source connected to input channel 2, Yes / No Base (reference) current of the differential protection On/Off for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr

Chan2IsLocal

No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9

No

IBase

0.1

3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr

Off On

Off

Table 63:
Parameter Operation

Parameter group settings for the L6CPDIF (L6D--) function


Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step Default Off Unit Description Differential Protection Function Operation Off/ On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase

IdMin

0.01

0.50

IB

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

0.01

1.25

IB

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

Table continued on next page

114

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter SlopeSection2 Range 10.0 - 50.0 Step 0.1 Default 40.0 Unit % Description Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase On/Off selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase On/Off selection of Cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % On/Off selection for compensation of charging currents On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

IdMinHigh

0.20 - 10.00

0.01

1.00

IB

IntervIdMinHig

0.250 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

NegSeqDiff

Off On 30.0 - 120.0

On

NegSeqROA

1.0

60.0

Deg

IMinNegSeq

0.01 - 0.20

0.01

0.04

IB

CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio

No Yes 5.0 - 100.0

1.0

No 10.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

ChargCurEnable

Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00

Off

AddDelay

Off

IMaxAddDelay

0.01

1.00

IB

DefDelay

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

0.000

IDMTtMin

0.001 - 6.000

0.001

0.010

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

115

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter CurveType Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10 Step Default IEC Def. Time Unit Description 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.

0.01

1.00

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.02

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.14

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

Table 64:
Parameter NoOfTerminals

General settings for the LT3CPDIF_87L (LT3D-) function


Range 2 3 No Yes Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit 2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection On/Off for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr

Chan2IsLocal

No

IBase

50.0 - 9999.9

0.1

3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

116

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter TransfAonInpCh Range No Transf A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9 Step Default No Transf A Unit Description Power transformer A applied on input channel X

TraAWind1Volt

0.1

130.0

kV

Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg

TraAWind2Volt

1.0 - 9999.9

0.1

130.0

kV

ClockNumTransA

0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes

0 [0 deg]

ZerSeqPassTraA

No

Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X

TransfBonInpCh

No Transf B 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9

No Transf B

TraBWind1Volt

0.1

130.0

kV

Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding)

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

117

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter TraBWind2Volt Range 1.0 - 9999.9 Step 0.1 Default 130.0 Unit kV Description Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg

ClockNumTransB

0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes

0 [0 deg]

ZerSeqPassTraB

No

Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr

Table 65:
Parameter Operation IdMin

Parameter group settings for the LT3CPDIF_87L (LT3D-) function


Range Off On 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.50 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase On/Off selection for internal / external fault discriminator

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

0.01

1.25

IB

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

IdMinHigh

0.20 - 10.00

0.01

1.00

IB

IntervIdMinHig

0.250 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

NegSeqDiff

Off On

On

Table continued on next page

118

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter NegSeqROA Range 30.0 - 120.0 Step 1.0 Default 60.0 Unit Deg Description Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase On/Off selection of the cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % On/Off selection for compensation of charging currents On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.

IMinNegSeq

0.01 - 0.20

0.01

0.04

IB

CrossBlock I2/I1Ratio

No Yes 5.0 - 100.0

1.0

No 10.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

ChargCurEnable

Off On Off On 0.20 - 5.00

Off

AddDelay

Off

IMaxAddDelay

0.01

1.00

IB

DefDelay

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

0.000

IDMTtMin

0.001 - 6.000

0.001

0.010

CurveType

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10

IEC Def. Time

0.01

1.00

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

119

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter p Range 0.01 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.02 Unit Description Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.14

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

Table 66:
Parameter NoOfTerminals

Basic general settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function


Range 2 3 4 5 6 No Yes 50.0 - 9999.9 Step Default 2 Unit Description Number of current terminals of the protected circuit

Chan2IsLocal

No

2-nd local current connected to input channel 2, Yes/ No Base (reference) current of the differential protection Off/On for elimination of zero seq. from diff. and bias curr Power transformer A applied on input channel X

IBase

0.1

3000.0

ZerSeqCurSubtr

Off ON

Off

TraAOnInpCh

No Transf A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9

No Transf A

RatVoltW1TraA

0.1

130.0

kV

Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding)

RatVoltW2TraA

1.0 - 9999.9

0.1

130.0

kV

Table continued on next page

120

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter ClockNumTransA Range 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes Step Default 0 [0 deg] Unit Description Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 5 for 150 deg

ZerSeqPassTraA

No

Yes/No for capability of transf A to transform zero seq curr Power transformer B applied on input channel X

TraBOnInpCh

No Transf B 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.0 - 9999.9

No Transf B

RatVoltW1TraB

0.1

130.0

kV

Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 1 (HV winding) Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on winding 2 (LV winding) Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30 deg, 2 for 60 deg

RatVoltW2TraB

1.0 - 9999.9

0.1

130.0

kV

ClockNumTransB

0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg lag] 7 [210 deg lag] 8 [240 deg lag] 9 [270 deg lag] 10 [300 deg lag] 11 [330 deg lag] No Yes

0 [0 deg]

ZerSeqPassTraB

No

Yes/No for capability of transf B to transform zero seq curr

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

121

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 67:
Parameter Operation IdMin

Basic parameter group settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function


Range Off ON 0.20 - 2.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.30 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Oper - restr charact., section 1 sensitivity, multiple IBase Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of IBase Time interval of initial lower sensitivity, in sec Unrestrained differential current limit, multiple of IBase Off/On selection for internal / external fault discriminator Internal/external fault discriminator Operate Angle, degrees Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple of IBase Off/On selection of the cross -block logic Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Off/On selection for compensation of charging currents On/Off selection for delayed diff. trip command Below limit, extra delay can be applied, multiple of IBase Definite time additional delay in seconds Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In seconds

IdMinHigh

0.20 - 10.00

0.01

0.80

IB

tIdMinHigh

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

NegSeqDiffEn

Off ON 30.0 - 120.0

ON

NegSeqROA

1.0

60.0

Deg

IMinNegSeq

0.01 - 0.20

0.01

0.04

IB

CrossBlockEn

No Yes 5.0 - 100.0

No

I2/I1Ratio

1.0

10.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

ChargCurEnable

Off ON Off ON 0.20 - 5.00

Off

AddDelay

Off

IMaxAddDelay

0.01

1.00

IB

tDefTime

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

0.000

tMinInv

0.001 - 6.000

0.001

0.010

Table continued on next page

122

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter CurveType Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.05 - 1.10 Step Default IEC Def. Time Unit Description 19 curve types. Example: 15 for definite time delay.

0.01

1.00

Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for inverse delays Sustained differential current alarm, factor of IBase Delay for alarm due to sustained differential current, in s

IdiffAlarm

0.05 - 1.00

0.01

0.15

IB

tAlarmdelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

10.000

Table 68:
Parameter EndSection1

Advanced parameter group settings for the LT6CPDIF_87LT (LT6D-) function


Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, as multiple of reference current IBase End of section 2, as multiple of reference current IBase Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain characteristic, in % Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type.

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.02

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

0.14

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

123

Section 4 Differential protection


Parameter b Range 0.01 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 Default 1.00 Unit Description Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Settable curve parameter, userprogrammable curve type. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated

0.01 - 1000.00

0.01

1.00

OpenCTEnable tOCTAlarmDelay

Off ON 0.100 - 10.000

0.001

ON 1.000

tOCTResetDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

0.250

Table 69:
Parameter Operation testModeSet ReleaseLocal

General settings for the LineDiffLogic (LDL--) function


Range Off On Off On Block all Release local Step Default On Off Block all Unit Description Operation Off / On Test mode On/Off Release of local terminal for trip under test mode

4.1.6

Technical data
Table 70:
Function Minimum operate current SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3 EndSection 1 EndSection 2 Unrestrained limit function Second harmonic blocking Fifth harmonic blocking Table continued on next page

Line differential protection (PDIF, 87L, 87LT)


Range or value (20-200)% of Ibase (10.0-50.0)% (30.0-100.0)% (20150)% of Ibase (1001000)% of Ibase (1005000)% of Ibase (5.0100.0)% of fundamental (5.0100.0)% of fundamental Accuracy 2.0% of Ir at I Ir 2.0% of I at I >Ir 2.0% of Ir at I Ir 2.0% of I at I > Ir 2.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ir

124

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection


Function Inverse characteristics, see table 436 and table 437 Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Charging current compensation Range or value 19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id 15 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id On/Off Accuracy See table 436 and table 437 -

4.2

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)


Function block name: HZDxANSI number: 87 IEC 61850 logical node name: HZPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IdN

4.2.1

Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores have same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage dependent resistor externally to the relay.

4.2.2

Principle of operation
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value.

4.2.2.1

Logic diagram
The logic diagram see figure 59 shows the operation principles for the high impedance differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only tripping by activating inputs from external signals.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

125

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 59:

Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.

4.2.3

Function block
HZD1HZPDIF_87 ISI BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT en05000363.vsd

Figure 60:

HZD function block

4.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 71:
Signal ISI BLOCK BLKTR

Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip

Table 72:
Signal TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT

Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block


Description Trip signal Alarm signal Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

126

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.5 Setting parameters


Table 73:
Parameter Operation U>Alarm

Parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function


Range Off On 2 - 500 Step 1 Default Off 10 Unit V Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms

tAlarm U>Trip

0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900

0.001 1

5.000 100

s V

SeriesResistor

10 - 20000

250

ohm

4.2.6

Technical data
Table 74:
Function Operate voltage Reset ratio Maximum continuous voltage Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)


Range or value (20-400) V >95% U>Trip2/series resistor 200 W 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud 90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Ud 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud Accuracy 1.0% of Ur for U < Ur 1.0% of U for U > Ur -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

127

128

Section 5 Distance protection

Section 5

Distance protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.

5.1

Distance protection zones (PDIS, 21)


Function block name: ZMx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMQPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a three zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 61).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

129

Section 5 Distance protection

X Forward operation

R Reverse operation

en05000034.vsd

Figure 61:

Typical distance protection zone with load encroachment function activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

5.1.2
5.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 62 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.

130

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 1

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 2

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 3

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 4

L1-N

L2-N

L3-N

L1-L2

L2-L3

L3-L1

Zone 5

en05000458.vsd

Figure 62:

The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

5.1.2.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 63 and figure 64. The phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

131

Section 5 Distance protection

X RFPE R1+Rn RFPE

Xn =
X1+Xn

X0 - X1 3

Rn = f N f N

R0 - R1 3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE

RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE

R1+Rn

RFPE
en05000661.vsd

Figure 63:

Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.

132

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

X RFPP 2R1

(Ohm/phase)
RFPP

2X1

R (Ohm/phase) RFPP RFPP

2X1

RFPP

2R1

RFPP
en05000662.vsd

Figure 64:

Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 65. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

133

Section 5 Distance protection

UL1

ILn

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-earth element

Phase-to-earth fault in phase L1

RFPE (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )

Phase-to-phase fault in phase L1-L2

UL1

IL1

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase element L1-L2 RFPP (Arc resistance)

IL2 UL2 R1 + j X1

UL1 Three-phase fault UL3

IL1

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase element L1-L3

IL3 R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181.vsd

Figure 65:
where: n m

Fault loop model

designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).

The R1 and jX1 in figure 65 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place. Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 65, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between 0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.

134

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 66. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X X X

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 66:

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

5.1.2.3

Minimum operating current


The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase currents. ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0. The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP. ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln. All three current limits IminOpPE, IminOpIN and IMinOpPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

135

Section 5 Distance protection


5.1.2.4 Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 4 (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 UL2 ---------------------Zapp = -I L1 IL2

(Equation 4)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3) The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 6.
U L1 Z app = ----------------------------I L1 + I N KN

(Equation 5)

Where: UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED KN is defined as:
KN = X0 - X1 3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 6 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 7, 136 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

X i ----- D U = R i + ---w0 D t

(Equation 7)

in complex notation, or:


X D Re ( I ) Re ( U ) = R Re ( I ) + ------ ----------------w0 Dt
(Equation 8)

X D Im ( I ) Im ( U ) = R Im ( I ) + ------ ---------------w0 Dt

(Equation 9)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 10)

where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) D Re ( I ) Re ( U ) D Im ( I ) ----------------------------------R m = -----------------------------------------------D Re ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )

(Equation 11)

Re ( U ) Im ( I ) Im ( U ) Re ( I )Xm = w 0 D t -----------------------------------------------------------------------------D Re ( I ) Im ( I ) D Im ( I ) Re ( I )

(Equation 12)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

137

Section 5 Distance protection


5.1.2.5 Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality is taken place in the function block ZD. Equation 13 and equation 14 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
0.8 U1L1 + 0.2 U1L1M -ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes IL1

(Equation 13)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
0.8 U1L1L2 + 0.2 U1L1L2M - < ArgNegRes -ArgDir < arg ---------------------------------------------------------------------I L1L2

(Equation 14)

where: ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and

ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 67. U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 is phase current in phase L1 is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 67) and it should not be changed unless system studies has shown the necessity. The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.

138

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir

en05000722.vsd

Figure 67:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

139

Section 5 Distance protection

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

5.1.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-earth as well as phase-to-phase. Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1). Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 68.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ. The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.

140

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

Figure 68:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 69.

Figure 69:

Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 70.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

141

Section 5 Distance protection

STNDL1N DIRL1N STNDL2N DIRL2N STNDL3N DIRL3N STNDL1L2 DIRL1L2 STNDL2L3 DIRL2L3 STNDL3L1 DIRL3L1

AND OR AND OR AND & 15 ms t STL1 & STZMPE.

AND

OR

&

15 ms t

STL2

AND OR AND OR &

15 ms t

STL3

&

STZMPP

BLK

OR

&

15 ms t

START

en05000778.vsd

Figure 70:

Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 71.

Figure 71:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

142

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection 5.1.3 Function block


ZM01ZMQPDIS I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND

en05000695.vsd

Figure 72:
ZD01ZDRDIR I3P U3P

ZM function block

STDIR

en05000681.vsd

Figure 73:

ZD function block

5.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 75:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK VTSZ BLKTR STCND DIRCND

Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocks all output by fuse failure signal Blocks all trip outputs External start condition (loop enabler) External directional condition

Table 76:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3

Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block


Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

143

Section 5 Distance protection


Signal START STL1 STL2 STL3 STND Description General Start, issued from any phase or loop Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop

Table 77:
Signal I3P U3P

Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block


Description Group connection Group connection

Table 78:
Signal STDIR

Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block


Description All start signals binary coded

5.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 79:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OperationDir

Parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

X1 R1

0.01 0.01

30.00 5.00

ohm/p ohm/p

X0 R0

0.10 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

100.00 15.00

ohm/p ohm/p

RFPP

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

30.00

ohm/l

Table continued on next page

144

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection


Parameter RFPE Range 1.00 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 100.00 Unit ohm/l Description Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhPh Time delay of trip, PhPh Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Time delay of trip, PhE Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Earth loops

OperationPP

Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30

On

Timer tPP

On

tPP OperationPE

0.001 -

0.000 On

s -

Timer tPE

On

tPE IMinOpPP

0.001 1

0.000 20

s %IB

IMinOpPE

10 - 30

20

%IB

IMinOpIN

5 - 30

%IB

Table 80:
Parameter ArgNegRes

Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function


Range 90 - 175 Step 1 Default 115 Unit Deg Description Angle to blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle to blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base Current Base Voltage

ArgDir

5 - 45

15

Deg

IMinOp IBase UBase

1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.05

10 3000 400.00

%IB A kV

5.1.6

Technical data

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

145

Section 5 Distance protection

Table 81:
Function Number of zones

Distance protection zones (PDIS, 21)


Range or value 3 with selectable direction (10-30)% of Ibase (0.50-3000.00) W/phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) W/loop (1.00-3000.00) W/loop <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees 0.5% 10 ms -

Minimum operate current Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, Ph-E Fault resistance, Ph-Ph Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

5.2

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)


Function block name: PHS-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: FDPSPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Z<phs

5.2.1

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The PHS function is designed to accurate select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore the function has an built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge

146

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

the resistive setting of both the PHS and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The extensive output signals from the PHS gives also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

5.2.2

Principle of operation
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section "Distance protection zones (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection" includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults. The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults. The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below. The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth connection Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDI is based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. Residual current criteria No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The STCNDI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from the function that indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction, or in between those (e.g. STFWL1 and STRVL1, and NDIR_A). These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are illustrated in figure 74.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

147

Section 5 Distance protection

60 R 60

60

R 60

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FW)

Reverse (RV)
en05000668.vsd

Figure 74:

Characteristic for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of PHS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment"). The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+ +STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+ +STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction in phase L1 and L2 etc. The STCND (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND input on the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

5.2.2.1

Phase-to-earth fault
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according to equation 15.

148

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

ZPHSn =

ULn ILn

(Equation 15)

where: n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to figure 75. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60. The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined according to equation 16 and equation 17.
RN = R0 - R1 3

(Equation 16)

XN =

X 0 - X1 3

(Equation 17)

X (ohm/loop) Kr(X1+XN) RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN RFFwPE RFRvPE X1 Kr = 60 deg R (Ohm/loop)

60 deg

1 tan(60 deg)

RFRvPE Kr(X1+XN)

RFFwPE

en06000396.vsd

Figure 75:

Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 18 and equation 19. RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 149

Section 5 Distance protection

3 I 0 0.5 IM in O p

(Equation 18)

3 I0 INReleasePE ----------------------------------- Iphmax 100

(Equation 19)

where: IMinOp is the minimum operation current for forward zones, INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E fault loops (in %) and Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

5.2.2.2

Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to equation 20.
ZPHS = ULm - ULn -2 ILn

(Equation 20)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase current in the lagging phase n. The operation characteristic is shown in figure 76.

150

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

X (ohm/phase) 0.5FRvPP KrX1 0.5RFFwPP

0.5RFFwPP 60 deg

X1

R (ohm/phase) 60 deg 0.5RFRvPP X1 Kr = 1 tan(60 deg)

KrX1 0.5RFRvPP 0.5RFFwPP


en05000670.vsd

Figure 76:

The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 21 or equation 22.
3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
(Equation 21)

3I 0 < INBlockPP Iph max

(Equation 22)

where:

INRelease Iphmax

is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops, is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

5.2.2.3

Three phase faults


The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault i.e. equation 20, equation 21 and equation 22 are used to release the operation of the function.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

151

Section 5 Distance protection

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counterclockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 77.
X (ohm/phase) 4 X1 3 90 deg 0.5RFFwPPK3 X1K3 4 RFFwPP 6

R (ohm/phase) 0.5RFRvPPK3 K3 = 2 / sqrt(3) 30 deg

en05000671.vsd

Figure 77:

The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters in italic)

5.2.2.4

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 78. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

152

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

RLdFw ARGLd ARGLd R

ARGLd

RLdRv

ARGLd

en05000196.vsd

Figure 78:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When selection mode is STCNDZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see figure 79, left illustration). When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 79. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

153

Section 5 Distance protection

STCNDZ

STCNDI
en05000197.vsd

Figure 79:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated

When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 80. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate area is highlighted in black.
X "Phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment characteristic R Directional line

en05000673.vsd

Figure 80:

Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is enabled

154

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

Figure 80 is valid for phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a threephase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 81. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
X (ohm/phase) Phase selection Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (ohm/phase)

en05000674.vsd

Figure 81:

Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

5.2.2.5

Minimum operate currents


The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values. The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2ILn<IMinOpPP).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

155

Section 5 Distance protection


5.2.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams
Figure 82 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toearth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is available within the terminal.

Figure 82:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A STCNDI output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 82. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals. Figure 83 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals PHS--STNDLn. Signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral" characteristic.

156

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

Figure 83:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 85 and figure 84. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 85) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 84) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor. Figure 84 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-E zone measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

157

Section 5 Distance protection

Figure 84:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

158

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

Figure 85:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

159

Section 5 Distance protection 5.2.3 Function block


PHS1FDPSPDIS_21 I3P U3P BLOCK DIRCND TRIP START STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2 STNDL3 STNDPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP STCNDZ STCNDI en06000258.vsd

Figure 86:

PHS function block

5.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 82:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK DIRCND

Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function External directional condition

Table 83:
Signal STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STNDL1 STNDL2

Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block


Description Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction Earth fault detected in forward direction Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction Earth fault detected in reverse direction Non directional start in L1 Non directional start in L2

Table continued on next page

160

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection


Signal STNDL3 STNDPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP STCNDZ STCNDI Description Non directional start in L3 Non directional start, phase-earth Start in forward direction for single-phase fault Start in forward direction for two- phase fault Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault Current conditions release of phase-earth measuring elements Current conditions release of phase-phase measuring elements Start condition (PHS,LE and I based) Start condition (LE and I based)

5.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 84:
Parameter IBase INBlockPP

Parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function


Range 1 - 99999 10 - 100 Step 1 1 Default 3000 40 Unit A %IPh Description Base current for current settings 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops Forward resistive reach within the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach within the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach Zero sequence reactance reach Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward

INReleasePE

10 - 100

20

%IPh

RLdFw

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

80.00

ohm/p

RLdRv

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

80.00

ohm/p

ArgLd

5 - 70

30

Deg

X1 X0 RFFwPP RFRvPP RFFwPE

0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01

40.00 120.00 30.00 30.00 100.00

ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

161

Section 5 Distance protection


Parameter RFRvPE IMinOpPP Range 1.00 - 9000.00 5 - 30 Step 0.01 1 Default 100.00 10 Unit ohm/l %IB Description Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

5.2.6

Technical data
Table 85:
Function Minimum operate current Reactive reach, positive sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, positive sequence Reactive reach, zero sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, zero sequence Fault resistance, phase-earth faults, forward and reverse Fault resistance, phase-phase faults, forward and reverse Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle Reset ratio

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)


Range or value (5-30)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) /phase (0.101000.00) /phase (0.509000.00) /phase (0.503000.00) /phase (1.009000.00) /loop (0.503000.00) /loop Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

(1.003000.00) /phase (5-70) degrees 105% typically -

5.3

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)


Function block name: PSD-ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMRPSB IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Zpsb

162

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection 5.3.1 Introduction


Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation plants. Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth fault currents during a power swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.

5.3.2

Principle of operation
The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 87 Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-ofthree or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions.

Figure 87:

Operating characteristic for the PSD function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

163

Section 5 Distance protection

The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving equation 23 and equation 24 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2 and L3).

U L1 Re IL1 Rset

(Equation 23)

U L1 Im IL1 Xset

(Equation 24)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following sections.

5.3.2.1

Resistive reach in forward direction


To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 25.

RLdInFw = kLdRFw RLdOutFw


where:

(Equation 25)

kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the parameter ARGLd. The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw). The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw. From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.

5.3.2.2

Resistive reach in reverse direction


To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment

164

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 26.
RLdInRv = kLdRRv RLdOutRv
(Equation 26)

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant. The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv. The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.

5.3.2.3

Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction


The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw. The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as X1InRv + DRv.

5.3.2.4

Basic detection logic


The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE. The PSD function can operate in two operating modes: The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the three phases. Figure 88 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DETL1 in this particular phase. The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 89 presents a composition of the detection signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTL1 (external boundary) and ZINL1 (internal boundary) in figure 88 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (Ln represents the corresponding phase L1, L2, and L3). They are internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

165

Section 5 Distance protection

The tP1 timer in figure 88 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 88 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.

Figure 88:

Detection of power-swing in phase L1

Figure 89:

Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

166

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

ZOUTL1 ZOUTL2 ZOUTL3 tEF t

OR ZINL1 AND ZINL2 ZINL3 AND OR

ZOUT

ZIN

TRSP I0CHECK

BLKI02

AND

10 ms t

OR tR1

AND -loop tR2 BLKI01 BLOCK -loop DET1of3 - int. REL1PH BLK1PH DET2of3 - int. REL2PH BLK2PH EXTERNAL AND t

OR

INHIBIT

AND tH OR AND t OR START

AND

en05000114.vsd

Figure 90:

PSD function-simplified block diagram

5.3.2.5

Operating and inhibit conditions


Figure 90 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 88 and figure 89 respectively. Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH. The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral. There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal: Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal instantaneously. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the 167

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 5 Distance protection

time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01 functional input. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if an earth fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the power swing has been detected before the earth fault (activation of the signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input. The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

5.3.3

Function block
PSD1ZMRPSB I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT ERNAL ST ART ZOUT ZIN

en05000383.vsd

Figure 91:

PSD function block

5.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 86:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH Table continued on next page

Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current detection Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode

168

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection


Signal I0CHECK TRSP EXTERNAL Description Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start output Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function Input for external detection of power swing

Table 87:
Signal START ZOUT ZIN

Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block


Description Power swing detected Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary

5.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 88:
Parameter Operation X1InFw R1LIn

Parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function


Range Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 0.01 Default Off 30.00 30.00 Unit ohm ohm Description Operation Mode On / Off Inner reactive boundary, forward Line resistance for inner characteristic angle Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line, forward Inner reactive boundary, reverse Fault resistance line to inner resistive boundary, reverse Operation of load discrimination characteristic Outer resistive load boundary, forward Load angle determining load impedance area Outer resistive load boundary, reverse Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, forward Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, reverse

R1FInFw

0.10 - 1000.00

0.01

30.00

ohm

X1InRv R1FInRv

0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00

0.01 0.01

30.00 30.00

ohm ohm

OperationLdCh

Off On 0.10 - 3000.00 5 - 70

On

RLdOutFw ArgLd

0.01 1

30.00 25

ohm Deg

RLdOutRv kLdRFw

0.10 - 3000.00 0.50 - 0.90

0.01 0.01

30.00 0.75

ohm Mult

kLdRRv

0.50 - 0.90

0.01

0.75

Mult

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

169

Section 5 Distance protection


Parameter tP1 tP2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.045 0.015 Unit s s Description Timer for detection of initial power swing Timer for detection of subsequent power swings Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer Timer for holding power swing START output Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing dead time Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base setting for current level settings

tW tH

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.250 0.500

s s

tEF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

tR1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

tR2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

IMinOpPE IBase

5 - 30 1 - 99999

1 1

10 3000

%IB A

5.3.6

Technical data
Table 89:
Function Reactive reach

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)


Range or value (0.10-3000.00) W/phase Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

Resistive reach

(0.101000.00)W /loop

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

5.4

Automatic switch onto fault logic (PSOF)


Function block name: SOTFANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZPSOF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

170

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection 5.4.1 Introduction


Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead.

5.4.2

Principle of operation
The switch-onto-fault (SOTF) function can be activated either externally or internally. The internal start is activated by using the information from a dead-linedetection (DLD) function, see figure 92, which is included in the SOTF function.

SOTF-BC SOTF-DLCND SOTF-NDACC SOTF-BLOCK & 200 ms


t

>1

1000 ms t & 15 ms t SOTF-TRIP

&
en00000492.vsd

Figure 92:

Simplified diagram for automatic switch onto fault logic function.

After activation, a distance protection zone (the non-directional starting signal) is allowed to give an instantaneous trip. The functional output signal from the distance protection zone to be used, should be connected to the NDACC functional input of the SOTF function, see figure 92. The distance protection zone used together with the switch-onto-fault function shall be set to cover the entire protected line. The external activation is achieved by an input (BC), which should be set high for activation, and low when the breaker has closed. This is carried out by an NC auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or by the closing order to the breaker. The internal automatic activation is controlled by the internal dead line detection (DLD) function. The function gives an internal output signal DLD when the current and voltage for each phase is below the setting parameter IPh< and UPh<, see figure 93. The SOTF function will be activated if the signal is present for more than 200 ms at the same time as the non-directional impedance starting signal NDACC is not activated. The SOTF function can be blocked by the activation of a SOTF-BLOCK functional input.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

171

Section 5 Distance protection

Iph_L1 IPh<

1 1<2 2

AND

Uph_L1 UPh< Iph_L2 IPh<

1 1<2 2 1 1<2 2 1 1<2 2 1 1<2 2 1 1<2 2


en05000737.vsd

AND

AND

SOTF-DLD

Uph_L2 UPh< Iph_L3 IPh<

AND

Uph_L3 UPh<

Figure 93:

Simplified logic diagram for dead line detection function in SOTF.

5.4.3

Function block
SOTFZPSOF I3P U3P BLOCK BC NDACC TRIP

en05000377.vsd

Figure 94:

SOTF function block

5.4.4

Input and output signals

172

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 5 Distance protection

Table 90:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BC NDACC

Input signals for the ZPSOF (SOTF-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Enabling of SOTF Non Directional Zone to be accelerated by SOTF

Table 91:
Signal TRIP

Output signals for the ZPSOF (SOTF-) function block


Description Trip output

5.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 92:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase IPh<

Parameter group settings for the ZPSOF (SOTF-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 1 Default On 3000 400.00 20 Unit A kV %IB Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current levels Base setting for voltage levels Current level for detection of dead line in % of IBase Voltage level for detection of dead line in % of UBase

UPh<

1 - 100

70

%UB

5.4.6

Technical data
Table 93:
Parameter Operate voltage, detection of dead line Operate current, detection of dead line Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF function is automatically enabled Time period after circuit breaker closure in which SOTF function is active

Automatic switch onto fault logic (PSOF)


Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase 200 ms 1000 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

173

174

Section 6 Current protection

Section 6

Current protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

6.1

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)


Function block name: IOCxANSI number: 50 IEC 61850 logical node name: PHPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>>

6.1.1

Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the power line at minimum source impedance.

6.1.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

175

Section 6 Current protection

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

6.1.3

Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50 I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 en04000391.vsd

Figure 95:

IOC function block

6.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 94:
Signal I3P BLOCK ENMULT

Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Enable current start value multiplier

Table 95:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3

Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block


Description Trip signal from any phase Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3

6.1.5

Setting parameters

176

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 96:
Parameter Operation IBase OpMode

Parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase Multiplier for operate current level

IP>>

200

%IB

StValMult

0.5 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

6.1.6

Technical data
Table 97:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)


Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.2

Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51_67)


Function block name: TOCxANSI number: 51/67 IEC 61850 logical node name: PH4POCM IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I> 4 4 alt

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

177

Section 6 Current protection 6.2.1 Introduction


The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

6.2.2

Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step an operation mode is set (DirModen): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The 4 step over current function The Mode Selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter DirModeX shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

178

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

faultState I3P U3P

Direction Element

dirPh1Flt dirPh2Flt dirPh3Flt

4 step over current element One element for each step

faultState

START

TRIP

I3P

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir Mode Selection enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740.vsd

Figure 96:

Functional overview of TOC.

A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (80%) and a memory voltage (20%). The following combinations are used.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

179

Section 6 Current protection

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
Phase-earth short circuit:

I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1

U refL1 = U L1

I dirL1 = I L1

U refL 2 = U L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3

I dirL 2 = I L 2
I dirL 3 = I L 3

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleRCA-maxFwdAng to AngleRCA+minFwdAng.

180

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Reverse

Uref RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd

Figure 97:

Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters minFwdAng and maxFwdAng gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set: IminOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

181

Section 6 Current protection 6.2.3 Function block


TOC1PH4POCM I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 en05000708.vsd

Figure 98:

TOC function block

6.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 98:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of trip Block of Step1 Block of Step2

182

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Signal BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 Description Block of Step3 Block of Step4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

Table 99:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1

Output signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block


Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 Common trip signal from step3 Common trip signal from step4 Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L3 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2 Common start signal from step3 Common start signal from step4 Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Start signal from step1 phase L1

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

183

Section 6 Current protection


Signal ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 Description Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3 Start signal from step3 phase L1 Start signal from step3 phase L2 Start signal from step3 phase L3 Start signal from step4 phase L1 Start signal from step4 phase L2 Start signal from step4 phase L3 Block from second harmonic detection Direction for phase1 Direction for phase2 Direction for phase3

6.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 100:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase MaxFwdAng MinFwdAng AngleRCA IMinOpPhSel

Parameter group settings for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40.0 - 70.0 75.0 - 90.0 -70.0 - -50.0 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 0.1 0.1 1.0 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 50.0 80.0 -65.0 7 Unit kV Deg Deg Deg %IB Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Base setting for voltage levels in kV Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental

StartPhSel

Not Used 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 5 - 100

1 out of 3

2ndHarmStab

20

%IB

Table continued on next page

184

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter DirMode1 Range Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

I1>

1000

%IB

Operate phase current level for step1 in % of IBase Independent (defenitive) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for operate current level for step 1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

I1Mult t1Min

1.0 - 10.0 0.000 - 60.000

0.1 0.001

2.0 0.000

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset1

0.001

0.020

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

185

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tCCrv1 Range 0.1 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain1

Disabled Enabled Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

Enabled

DirMode2

Non-directional

Characterist2

ANSI Def. Time

I2>

500

%IB

Operate phase current level for step2 in % of IBase Independent (defenitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

k2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

I2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Table continued on next page

186

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter ResetTypeCrv2 Range Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

tReset2

0.001

0.020

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain2

Disabled Enabled Off Non-directional Forward Reverse

Enabled

DirMode3

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

187

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter Characterist3 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for step 3

I3>

250

%IB

Operate phase current level for step3 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay for step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 3 Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

k3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

I3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset3

0.001

0.020

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Table continued on next page

188

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tPRCrv3 Range 0.005 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.500 Unit Description Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 4

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain3

Disabled Enabled Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

Enabled

DirMode4

Non-directional

Characterist4

ANSI Def. Time

I4>

175

%IB

Operate phase current level for step4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 4 Selection of reset curve type for step 4

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

I4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

189

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tReset4 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.020 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of Step 4 from harmonic restrain

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain4

Disabled Enabled

Enabled

6.2.6

Technical data
Table 101:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Second harmonic blocking Independent time delay Table continued on next page

Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)


Setting range (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1-100)% of lbase (-70.0 -50.0) degrees (40.070.0) degrees (75.090.0) degrees (5100)% of fundamental (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms

190

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Function Minimum operate time Inverse characteristics, see table 436 and table 437 Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Setting range (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms See table 436 and table 437 -

6.3

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)


Function block name: IEFxANSI number: 50N IEC 61850 logical node name: EFPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IN>>

6.3.1

Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow use as a high set short circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the power line at minimum source impedance. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

6.3.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

191

Section 6 Current protection

The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

6.3.3

Function block
IEF1EFPIOC I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP

en04000393.vsd

Figure 99:

IEF function block

6.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 102:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN

Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block input for auto reclose Enable current multiplier

Table 103:
Signal TRIP

Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block


Description Trip signal

6.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 104:
Parameter Operation IBase IN>>

Parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Operate residual current level in % of IBase Multiplier for operate current level

StValMult

0.5 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

192

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection 6.3.6 Technical data


Table 105:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)


Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.4

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)


Function block name: TEFxANSI number:51N/ 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: EF4PEFM IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IN 4 4 alt

6.4.1

Introduction
The four step single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. The function can be set to be directional, forward, reverse or non-directional independently for each of the steps. A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

193

Section 6 Current protection

The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available as well. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

6.4.2

Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step an operation modem DirModen is set: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicate earth current fault direction. The directional check uses 3I0cos(-RCA) for comparison The harmonic Restraint Blocking function 4 step over current function Switch On To Fault function (SOTF), including Under Time Mode Selection Blocking at parallel transformers

194

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Directional Check Element

signal to communication scheme

3U0 3I0

Direction Element

operatingCurrent earthFaultDirection angleValid

4 step over current element One element for each step

TRIP

enableDir

3I0

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

start step 2, 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault CB pos or cmd TRIP

Mode Selection

enableDir enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en05000741.vsd

Figure 100:

Functional overview of TEF

The sampled analog residual current is pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency component the RMS value of the residual current is derived. This residual current value is fed to the TEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this step and a common Start signal. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. A fault is in the forward direction if the residual current component 3I0cos(-RCA) is larger than a set level. The angle is the angle between the residual current and the polarizing voltage (3U0). The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage. The AngleRCA is the characteristic angle of the directional function.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

195

Section 6 Current protection

RCA

Upol = -3U0

Operation IN>Dir

en05000285.vsd

Figure 101:

Characteristic of the directional option

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter 23 "Time inverse characteristics" Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter 23 "Time inverse characteristics" There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (INxMult, x = 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd

196

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

harmonic restrain signal will latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

6.4.2.1

Switch onto fault logic


Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and undertime logic. The parameter SOFT is set to activate either SOTF or undertime function or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close energize a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF function will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time the SOTF/ Undertime function will be active after activation is set by the parameter t4U. The SOFT function uses the start signal from step 2 or 3, which is set by parameter Step3ForSOTF. The function is activated from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms). The undertime function uses the start signal from step 4. The function will normally be set to a lower current level than the SOTF function. The undertime function can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restrain function. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur. The detection of unsymmetrical CB poles after switching is thus possible. The function is activated from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulse. This is set by parameter ActUnderTime. The parameter ActUnderTime can be set for activation of CB position change or CB close/open command. In case of a residual current start from step 4 the function will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

197

Section 6 Current protection 6.4.3 Function block


T EF1EF4PEFM BLOCK I3P BLKT R U3P BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT 1 ENMULT 2 ENMULT 3 ENMULT 4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB T RIP T RIN1 T RIN2 T RIN3 T RIN4 T RSOT F START ST IN1 ST IN2 ST IN3 ST IN4 ST SOT F STFW STRV 2NDHARMD en04000395.vsd

Figure 102:

TEF function block

6.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 106:
Signal BLOCK I3P BLKTR U3P BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB

Input signals for the EF4PEFM_51N67N (TEF1-) function block


Description Block of function Group signal for current input Block of trip Group signal for voltage input Block of step 1 (Start and trip) Block of step 2 (Start and trip) Block of step 3 (Start and trip) Block of step 4 (Start and trip) When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4 Breaker position Breaker close command Breaker open command

198

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 107:
Signal TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD

Output signals for the EF4PEFM_51N67N (TEF1-) function block


Description Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function General start signal Start signal step 1 Start signal step 2 Start signal step 3 Start signal step 4 Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function Forward directional start signal Reverse directional start signal 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 108:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase IMinOpFund

Parameter group settings for the EF4PEFM_51N67N (TEF1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 1 - 2500 Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 3 Unit A kV %IB Description Operation mode Off / On Base setting for current values Base setting for voltage level in kV Minimum fundamental frequency current level in % of IBase Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Minimum polarizing quantity in % of UBase Operate residual current level for DirComp in % of IBase Time delay for DirComp

AngleRCA 3UO>Dir

-180 - 180 1 - 100

1 1

65 5

Deg %UB

IN>DirCmp

1 - 100

%IB

tDirCmp

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

10.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

199

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter 2ndHarmStab Range 5 - 100 Step 1 Default 20 Unit % Description Second harmonic restrain operation in % of INAMPL Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4) Enable blocking at parallel transformers Select signal that shall activate SOTF SOFT operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF +undertime) Time delay for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain functionin SOTF Switch-onto-fault active time Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/ CBCommand) Time delay for under time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

UseStartValue

IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off On Open Closed CloseCommand Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF +UnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 CB position CB command

IN1>

BlkParTransf ActivationSOTF

Off Open

SOTF

Off

tSOTF HarmResSOTF

0.001 -

0.100 Disabled

s -

t4U ActUnderTime

0.001 -

5.000 CB position

s -

tUnderTime DirMode1

0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

0.001 -

0.300 Non-directional

s -

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

IN1>

100

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase

Table continued on next page

200

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter t1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset1

0.001

0.020

HarmRestrain1

Disabled Enabled 0.005 - 3.000

Enabled

tPCrv1

0.001

1.000

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

DirMode2

Off Non-directional Forward Reverse

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

201

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter Characterist2 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve for step 2

IN2>

50

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves step 2 Reset mode when current drops off step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

k2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset2 HarmRestrain2

0.001 -

0.020 Enabled

s -

tPCrv2

0.001

1.000

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Table continued on next page

202

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tCCrv2 Range 0.1 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 3

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

DirMode3

Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

Non-directional

Characterist3

ANSI Def. Time

IN3>

33

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for step 3 Selection of reset curve type for step 3

t3 k3

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.800 0.05

s -

IN3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

203

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tReset3 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.020 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Select step3 to be connected to SOTF Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

HarmRestrain3

Disabled Enabled 0.005 - 3.000

Enabled

tPCrv3

0.001

1.000

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Step3ForSOTF DirMode4

step 2 init step 3 init Off Non-directional Forward Reverse

step 2 init Non-directional

Table continued on next page

204

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter Characterist4 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Time delay curve type for step 4

IN4>

17

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in IEC IDMT modes step 4 Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset4

0.001

0.020

HarmRestrain4

Disabled Enabled 0.005 - 3.000

Enabled

tPCrv4

0.001

1.000

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

205

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter tCCrv4 Range 0.1 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

6.4.6

Technical data
Table 109:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 436 and table 437 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Minimum polarizing voltage Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)


Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1100)% of lbase (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (5100)% of fundamental (-180 to 180) degrees (1100)% of Ubase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 436 and table 437 2.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 1.0% of Ur -

6.5

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

206

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Function block name: THLxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: LPTTR

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.5.1

Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines. A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits. The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory. An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line will be tripped.

6.5.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the THL function. From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:

Q final

I = I ref

T ref

(Equation 33)

where: I Iref Tref is the largest phase current, is a given reference current and is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref

If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a start output signal START is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as: RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 207

Section 6 Current protection

Dt Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

(Equation 34)

where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt t is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate toperate = -t ln final Q final - Q n

(Equation 35)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp. The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q - Qlockout _ release tlockout _ release = -t ln final Q final - Q n

(Equation 36)

The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure.

208

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated. The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

Final Temp > TripTemp

start signal

Calculation of actual temperature

actual temperature

IL1, IL2, IL3

Calculation of final temperature Actual Temp > AlarmTemp alarm signal

trip signal Actual Temp > TripTemp initiate lockout

Actual Temp Reset of lockout after trip < Recl Temp

Calculation of time to trip

time to trip

Calculation of time to reset of lockout

time to reset of lockout

en05000736.vsd

Figure 103:

Functional overview of THL

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

209

Section 6 Current protection 6.5.3 Function block


THL1LPTTR_26 I3P BLOCK ENMULT RESET TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT en04000396.vsd

Figure 104:

THL function block

6.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 110:
Signal I3P BLOCK ENMULT RESET

Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 111:
Signal TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT

Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block


Description Trip Start Signal Alarm signal Lockout signal

6.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 112:
Parameter Operation HystTemp IBase IMult

Parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function


Range Off On 0 - 50 0 - 99999 1-5 Step 1 1 1 Default Off 10 3000 1 Unit A Description Operation Off / On Hysteresis for start temperature Base current in A Current multiplier when THOL is used for two or more lines The load current (in %of IBase) leading to TRef temperature

IRef

0 - 400

100

%IB

Table continued on next page

210

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter TRef Range 0 - 400 Step 1 Default 90 Unit Deg C Description End temperature of the line when loaded with IRef Time constant of the line in minutes. Temperature level for trip Temperature level for start (alarm) Temperature for reset of lockout after trip

Tau TripTemp AlarmTemp ReclTemp

0 - 1000 0 - 400 0 - 200 0 - 400

1 1 1 1

45 90 80 75

Min Deg C Deg C Deg C

6.5.6

Technical data
Table 113:
Function Reference current Start temperature reference Operate time:

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)


Range or value (0-400)% of Ibase (0-400)C Ip = load current before overload occurs Time constant t = (01000) minutes Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 1.0C IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms

I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
I = Imeasured Alarm temperature Trip temperature

(0-200)C (0-400)C (0-400)C

2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip

Reset level temperature

6.6

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)


Function block name: BFPxANSI number: 50BF IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRBRF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>BF

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

211

Section 6 Current protection 6.6.1 Introduction


The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based or adaptive combination between these two principles. A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve a high security against unnecessary operation. The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase started to allow use with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command. The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect starting due to mistakes during testing.

6.6.2

Principle of operation
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external protection devices. The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the backup trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated after an added settable time after the first back-up trip. Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-

212

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

Current AND BLOCK Current & Contact t1 AND t tp TRRETL1

STIL1 AND START STL1 OR

OR TRRET

OR CBCLDL1 AND AND Contact L2 L3

en05000832.vsd

Figure 105:

Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

213

Section 6 Current protection

Figure 106:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>. Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude larger than setting parameter IN>.

214

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

More than 1 current high 1 of 3 AND

t2MPh t tp OR TRBU

1 of 4

OR

t2 t t3 t tp TRBU2

2 of 3 AND CBFLT CBALARM t CBALARM

en06000223.vsd

Figure 107:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

6.6.3

Function block
BFP1CCRBRF I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT T RBU T RBU2 T RRET T RRET L1 T RRET L2 T RRET L3 CBALARM

en04000397.vsd

Figure 108:

BFP function block

6.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 114:
Signal I3P BLOCK START STL1 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Three phase start of breaker failure protection function Start signal of phase L1

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

215

Section 6 Current protection


Signal STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT Description Start signal of phase L2 Start signal of phase L3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.

Table 115:
Signal TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM

Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block


Description Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3 Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

6.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 116:
Parameter Operation IBase FunctionMode

Parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off I> Check No I> Check 5 - 200 5 - 200 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current level settings Detection for back-up trip Current/Cont/ Current and Cont Back-up trip mode, 2 out of 4, 1 out of 3 or 1 out of 4 Operation mode of retrip logic: OFF/I> check/No I> check Operate level in % of IBase Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Operate residual level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip

BuTripMode

1 out of 3

RetripMode

Retrip Off

IP> I>BlkCont

1 1

10 20

%IB %IB

IN> t1

2 - 200 0.000 - 60.000

1 0.001

10 0.000

%IB s

Table continued on next page

216

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection


Parameter t2 t2MPh Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 0.150 Unit s s Description Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal Trip pulse duration

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.030

tCBAlarm tPulse

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 0.200

s s

6.6.6

Technical data
Table 117:
Function Operate phase current Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current Reset ratio, residual current Phase current level for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers Operate time for current detection Reset time for current detection

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)


Range or value (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (2-200)% of lbase > 95% (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 10 ms typically 15 ms maximum Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

6.7

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)


Function block name: STB-ANSI number: 50STB IEC 61850 logical node name: STBPTOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>STUB

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

217

Section 6 Current protection 6.7.1 Introduction


When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked. The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

6.7.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function I>. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination with a release signal, activate the timer of this function. If the fault current remains during the set timer delay t the function gives a trip signal.
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK TRIP

STIL1 STIL2 STIL3 RELEASE OR

AND

en05000731.vsd

Figure 109:

Simplified logic diagram for the stub protection

218

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection 6.7.3 Function block


STB1STBPTOC_50STB I3P BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE TRIP START

en05000678.vsd

Figure 110:

STB function block

6.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 118:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKTR RELEASE

Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip Release of stub protection

Table 119:
Signal TRIP START

Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block


Description Trip General start

6.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 120:
Parameter Operation IBase ReleaseMode I> t

Parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 Release Continuous 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 Release 200 0.000 Unit A %IB s Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Release of stub protection Operate current level in % of IBase Time delay

6.7.6
RED 670

Technical data
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 219

Section 6 Current protection

Table 121:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Definite time

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)


Range or value (1-2500)% of Ibase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

6.8

Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)


Function block name: PDx-ANSI number: 50PD IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRPLD IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

PD

6.8.1

Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase current when required.

6.8.2

Principle of operation
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown in figure 111

220

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

C.B.

poleDiscordance Signal from C.B.


en05000287.vsd

Figure 111:

Pole discordance external detection logic

This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay. There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in figure 112
C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. + poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd

Figure 112:

Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

221

Section 6 Current protection

values are fed to the PD function. The difference between the smallest and the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance function is shown in figure 113.
BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR

PolPosAuxCont POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL AND Discordance detection AND OR PD Signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en05000747.vsd t+200 ms AND t t 150 ms TRIP

Figure 113:

Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and current based

The pole discordance function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

222

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate a trip signal TRIP: Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.

6.8.2.1

Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker


If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.

6.8.2.2

Unsymmetrical current detection


Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that: any phase current is lower than 80% of the highest current in the remaining two phases the highest phase current is greater than 10% of the rated current

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

223

Section 6 Current protection 6.8.3 Function block


PD01CCRPLD I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXT PDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL T RIP ST ART

en05000321.vsd

Figure 114:

PD function block

6.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 122:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL

Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle Close order to CB Open order to CB Pole discordance signal from CB logic Pole one opened indication from CB Pole one closed indication from CB Pole two opened indication from CB Pole two closed indication from CB Pole three opened indication from CB Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 123:
Signal TRIP START

Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block


Description Trip signal to CB Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

6.8.5

Setting parameters

224

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 124:
Parameter Operation IBase TimeDelayTrip

Parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Unit A s Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current levels Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection Current function selection

ContSel

Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -

Off

CurrSel

Off

CurrUnsymLevel

80

Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase

CurrRelLevel

0 - 100

10

%IB

6.8.6

Technical data
Table 125:
Function Operate current Time delay

Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)


Range or value (0100% of Ibase (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

225

226

Section 7 Voltage protection

Section 7

Voltage protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

7.1

Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)


Function block name: TUVxANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: PH2PUVM IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U<

7.1.1

Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

7.1.2

Principle of operation
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured phase voltages, being below the set point. If the phase voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

227

Section 7 Voltage protection

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The undervoltage protection function measures the phase to earth voltages, if the voltage transformer is connected phase to earth to the analogue voltage inputs. The setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the phase to earth voltage gets lover than the set percentage of the phase to earth voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3


(Equation 38)

If the voltage transformer is connected phase to phase to the analogue input, the setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage divided by 3. The function will operate if the phase to phase voltage gets lover than the set percentage of the phase to phase voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase.

7.1.2.1

Measurement principle
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:

t=

k U < -U U<

(Equation 39)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U < -U - 0.5 32 U<


2.0

+ 0.055
(Equation 40)

228

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

The programmable curve can be created as:

kA +D t= p U < -U -C B U<

(Equation 41)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 42)

The lowest phase voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 115. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

Voltage

UL1 UL2 UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time
en05000009.vsd

Figure 115:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 229

Section 7 Voltage protection

during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 116 and figure 117.
tReset 1 Measured Voltage TRIP

Voltage

START Hysteresis

tReset 1

U1<

Time START TRIP


t1

Time Integrator t1

Froozen Timer

Instantaneous Reset

Time
Linear Decrease en05000010.vsd

Figure 116:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

230

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage START

tReset1 tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP Measured Voltage

U1<

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator t1

Froozen Timer

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000011.vsd

Figure 117:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.1.2.3

Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

231

Section 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 118. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 118:

Blocking function.

232

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


7.1.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the phase-to-neutral voltages in all three phases. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest phase voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 119.
UL1 Comparator UL1 < U1< Comparator UL2 < U1< Comparator UL3 < U1< ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
Phase 1

UL2

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

START Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

MinVoltSelect or

TRIP

OR

Comparator UL1 < U2< Comparator UL2 < U2< Comparator UL3 < U2<

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2


TR2L3

START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2

OR

MinVoltSelect or

TRIP

OR

TR2 OR START

OR

TRIP

en05000012.vsd

Figure 119:

Schematic design of the TUV function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

233

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.1.3 Function block


T UV1PH2PUVM U3P BLOCK BLKT R1 BLKST1 BLKT R2 BLKST2 T RIP TR1 T R1L1 T R1L2 T R1L3 TR2 T R2L1 T R2L2 T R2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd

Figure 120:

TUV function block

7.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 126:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the PH2PUVM_27 (TUV1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 127:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3

Output signals for the PH2PUVM_27 (TUV1-) function block


Description Operate signal Operate signal for step 1 Operate signal for phase 1, step 1 Operate signal for phase 2, step 1 Operate signal for phase 3, step 1 Operate signal for step 2 Operate signal for phase 1, step 2 Operate signal for phase 2, step 2 Operate signal for phase 3, step 2

Table continued on next page

234

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


Signal START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Start signal Start signal for step1 Start signal for phase 1, step 1 Start signal for phase 2, step 1 Start signal for phase 3, step 1 Start signal for step 2 Start signal for phase 1, step 2 Start signal for phase 2, step 2 Start signal for phase 3, step 2

7.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 128:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1

Basic parameter group settings for the PH2PUVM_27 (TUV1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage, phasephase in kV Operation characteristic selection, step 1 Operation Mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 1. Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 1 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 1 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

U1<

70

%UB

t1 t1Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 5.000

s s

k1 IntBlkSel1

0.05 Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100

0.01 -

0.05 - 1.10 Off

IntBlkStVal1

20

%UB

tBlkUV1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs1

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

235

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter HystAbsIntBlk1 Range 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 Default 0.5 Unit %UB Description Abs hysteresis for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Operation characteristic selection, step 2 Operation Mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 2 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2 Abs hysteresis for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2

Characterist2

Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100

Definite time

OpMode2

1 out of 3

U2<

50

%UB

t2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 5.000

s s

k2 IntBlkSel2

0.05 Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100

0.01 -

0.05 - 1.10 Off

IntBlkStVal2

20

%UB

tBlkUV2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs2 HystAbsIntBlk2

0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0

0.1 0.1

0.5 0.5

%UB %UB

Table 129:
Parameter tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Advanced parameter group settings for the PH2PUVM_27 (TUV1-) function


Range 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Instantaneous Unit s Description Time delay in DT reset (s), step 1 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 1

tIReset1 ACrv1

0.001 0.001

0.025 0.005 - 200.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Setting A for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1

Table continued on next page

236

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter BCrv1 Range 1.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.50 - 100.00 Unit Description Setting B for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting C for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting D for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting P for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 2

CCrv1

0.0

0.1

0.0 - 1.0

DCrv1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 60.000

PCrv1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 3.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000

0.001 -

0.025 Instantaneous

s -

tIReset2 ACrv2

0.001 0.001

0.025 0.005 - 200.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Setting A for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting B for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting C for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting D for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting P for programmable under voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2

BCrv2

1.00

0.01

0.50 - 100.00

CCrv2

0.0

0.1

0.0 - 1.0

DCrv2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 60.000

PCrv2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 3.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

7.1.6

Technical data

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

237

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 130:
Function

Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)


Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur See table 438 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, low and high step Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 438 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

7.2

Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)


Function block name: TOVxANSI number: 59 IEC 61850 logical node name: PH2POVM IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U>

7.2.1

Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines. The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control the voltage. The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to system service voltage.

7.2.2
238

Principle of operation
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured phase voltages, being above the set point. If the phase voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The overvoltage protection function measures the phase to earth voltages, if the voltage transformer is connected phase to earth to the analogue voltage inputs. The setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the phase to earth voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the phase to earth voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over

U > (%) UBase( kV ) 3


(Equation 43)

If the voltage transformer is connected phase to phase to the analogue input, the setting of the analogue inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage divided by 3. The function will operate if the phase to phase voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the phase to phase voltage corresponding to the set base voltage UBase.

7.2.2.1

Measurement principle
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

239

Section 7 Voltage protection

t=

k U < -U U<

(Equation 44)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>


2.0

- 0.035
(Equation 45)

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>


3.0

- 0.035
(Equation 46)

The programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA U -U > -C B U>
p

+D
(Equation 47)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 48)

The highest phase voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 121. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"

240

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage IDMT Voltage

UL1 UL2 UL3

Time
en05000016.vsd

Figure 121:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 122 and figure 123.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

241

Section 7 Voltage protection

tReset1 tReset1 Voltage START TRIP

U1>

Hysteresis Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator Froozen Timer t1

Linear Decrease

Instantaneous Reset

Time en05000017.vsd

Figure 122:

Voltage profile note causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

242

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage START

tReset1 START TRIP

tReset1 Hysteresis

U1> Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator

Froozen Timer

t1

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000018.vsd

Figure 123:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.2.2.3

Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

243

Section 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the phase-to-neutral voltages in all three phases. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest phase voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is schematically described in figure 124.

244

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

UL1

Comparator UL1 > U1> Comparator UL2 > U1> Comparator UL3 > U1>

ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3


Phase 1

UL2

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

START Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP

OR

Comparator UL1 > U2> Comparator UL2 > U2> Comparator UL3 > U2>

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2

START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2

OR

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP TR2L3 TR2


START

OR OR

OR

TRIP

en05000013.vsd

Figure 124:

Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

245

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.2.3 Function block


T OV1PH2POVM U3P BLOCK BLKT R1 BLKST1 BLKT R2 BLKST2 T RIP TR1 T R1L1 T R1L2 T R1L3 TR2 T R2L1 T R2L2 T R2L3 ST ART ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000328.vsd

Figure 125:

TOV function block

7.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 131:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the PH2POVM_59 (TOV1-) function block


Description Group signal for three phase voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 132:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3

Output signals for the PH2POVM_59 (TOV1-) function block


Description Operate signal Operate signal for step 1 Operate signal from phase 1, step 1 Operate signal from phase 2, step 1 Operate signal from phase 3, step 1 Operate signal for step 2 Operate signal from phase 1, step 2 Operate signal from phase 2, step 2 Operate signal from phase 3, step 2

Table continued on next page

246

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


Signal START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Start signal Start signal for step1 Start signal from phase 1, step 1 Start signal from phase 2, step 1 Start signal from phase 3, step 1 Start signal for step 2 Start signal from phase 1, step 2 Start signal from phase 2, step 2 Start signal from phase 3, step 2

7.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 133:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1

Parameter group settings for the PH2POVM_59 (TOV1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage, phasephase in kV Operation charcteristic selection, step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Operation mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 1. Time delay in DT reset (s), step 1 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 1 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 1

U1>

120

%UB

t1 tReset1 t1Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

5.000 0.025 5.000

s s s

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

Instantaneous

tIReset1 k1

0.001 0.01

0.025 0.05

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 1

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

247

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter ACrv1 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Operation characteristic selection, step 2

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

HystAbs1 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200

0.1 -

0.5 Definite time

%UB -

OpMode2

1 out of 3

Operation mode, 1 out of 3 / 2 out of 3 / 3 out of 3, step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Operate time delay in DT mode, step 2 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 2 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 2

U2>

180

%UB

t2 tReset2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

5.000 0.025 5.000

s s s

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

Instantaneous

tIReset2 k2

0.001 0.01

0.025 0.05

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 2

Table continued on next page

248

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter ACrv2 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

7.2.6

Technical data
Table 134:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 439 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)


Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 439 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

249

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.3

Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)


Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N IEC 61850 logical node name: R2POVM IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U0

7.3.1

Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults. The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.

7.3.2

Principle of operation
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.

7.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

250

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


7.3.2.2 Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t= k U < -U U<

(Equation 49)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>


2.0

- 0.035
(Equation 50)

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>


3.0

- 0.035
(Equation 51)

The programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA U -U > -C B U>
p

+D
(Equation 52)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 53)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse characteristics".

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

251

Section 7 Voltage protection

Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 126 and figure 127.
tReset 1 Voltage START tReset1 TRIP

U1>

Hysteresis

Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator Froozen Timer t1

Linear Decrease

Instantaneous Reset

Time en05000019.vsd

Figure 126:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

252

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage START

tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP

tReset1

U1> Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator

Froozen Timer

t1

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000020.vsd

Figure 127:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.3.2.3

Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

253

Section 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.3.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in figure 128.

UN

Comparator UN > U1> START

Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1 TR1

Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

Comparator UN > U2> START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2 OR

ST2 TR2

OR

START

TRIP

TRIP

en05000748.vsd

Figure 128:

Schematic design of the TRV function

254

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.3.3 Function block


TRV1R2POVM U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2 en05000327.vsd

Figure 129:

TRV function block

7.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 135:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the R2POVM_59N (TRV1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 136:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2

Output signals for the R2POVM_59N (TRV1-) function block


Description Operate signal Operate signal for step 1 Operate signal for step 2 Start signal Start signal for step 1 Start signal for step 2

7.3.5

Setting parameters

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

255

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 137:
Parameter Operation UBase Characterist1

Parameter group settings for the R2POVM_59N (TRV1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage, phasephase in kV Operation characteristic selection, step 1

U1>

30

%UB

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Operate time delay in DT mode, step 1. Time delay in DT reset (s), step 1 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 1 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 1

t1 tReset1 t1Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

5.000 0.025 5.000

s s s

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.005 - 200.000

Instantaneous

tIReset1 k1 ACrv1

0.001 0.01 0.001

0.025 0.05 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 1 Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

HystAbs1

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

Table continued on next page

256

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter Characterist2 Range Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100 Step Default Definite time Unit Description Operation characteristic selection, step 2

U2>

45

%UB

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Operate time delay in DT mode, step 2 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Minimum operate time in IDMT mode (s), step 2 IDMT mode reset type selector, step 2

t2 tReset2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

5.000 0.025 5.000

s s s

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10 0.005 - 200.000

Instantaneous

tIReset2 k2 ACrv2

0.001 0.01 0.001

0.025 0.05 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode, step 2 Setting A for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting B for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting C for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting D for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Setting P for programmable over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

7.3.6

Technical data

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

257

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 138:
Function

Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)


Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.00060.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 440 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 440 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

7.4

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)


Function block name: OEXxANSI number: 24 IEC 61850 logical node name: OEXPVPH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

U/f >

7.4.1

Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time.

7.4.2

Principle of operation
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits. Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if

258

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system. Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 54, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A

(Equation 54)

The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 55.


V- Ef ---------------------------M = relative Hz = ( Ur ) ( fr )
(Equation 55)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations. Overexcitation will result in: overheating of the non-laminated metal parts, a large increase in magnetizing currents, an increase in core and winding temperature, an increase in transformer vibration and noise.

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds. Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal. The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

259

Section 7 Voltage protection

exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 56.
E ------- 1.1 Ur fr f

(Equation 56)

or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 57.


V/Hz> E --- --------------------fr f

(Equation 57)

where:

V/Hz>

is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 1.0 pu to 1.5 pu. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used. In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed according to equation 58.
Ef V- -----M = relative Hz = ------------Ur fr
(Equation 58)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in pu. The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 59.
overexcitation = M V/Hz>
(Equation 59)

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power transformer OEX is placed As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided

260

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.. OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced voltage E. It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-toearth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

7.4.2.1

Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used. If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied, etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz respectively.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

261

Section 7 Voltage protection

OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow. The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.

7.4.2.2

Operate time of the overexcitation protection.


The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between: the so called IEEE law, and a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match well a transformer core capability. The square law is according to equation 60.
0.18 k 0.18 k - = -------------------------------------t o p = -------------------------------------------2 2 overexcitation ( M V/Hz> )

(Equation 60)

where: M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 131. Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

V/Hz>
k

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 61.
t op

( M(t) V/Hz> )
0

dt 0.18 k
(Equation 61)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes true that:
n

Dt

( M(j)
j=k

V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
(Equation 62)

where: Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and

262

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n. Inverse delays as per figure 131, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 130.
delay in s tMax

under excitation

inverse delay law

overexcitation tMin 0 M=V/Hz> V/Hz> Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz> Mmax Emax Excitation M E (only if f = fr = const) 99001067.vsd

Figure 130:

Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax, and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMax seconds. A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips after tMin seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>), the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

263

Section 7 Voltage protection

Time (s)

IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100 k = 60

k = 20

10

k = 10 k=9 k=8 k=7 k=6 k=5 k=4 k=3 k=2

k=1 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN %

(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd

Figure 131:

Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation.

The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/Hz>> = 1.40 pu, then Mmax is according to equation 63.
(V/Hz>>) f - = 1.40 Mmax = ------------------------Ur fr

(Equation 63)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in the figure 132. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.

264

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

delay in s

tMax

underexcitation 0 Emaxcont

tMin Overexcitation M-Emaxcont Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M Mmax 99001068.vsd

Figure 132:

An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation. Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

7.4.2.3

Cooling
The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.

7.4.2.4

OEX protection function measurands


A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax. The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated from the expression:
V Ef - = ------------M = relative ----- Hz Uf fr

(Equation 64)

If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/ RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 265

Section 7 Voltage protection

is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is shown, while V/Hz> = 1.1 pu, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit. The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus. This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the ThermalStaus shall go over 100%. If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin, then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

7.4.2.5

Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.

7.4.2.6

Logic diagram

Figure 133:

A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values. 266 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.4.3 Function block


OEX1OEXPVPH I3P U3P BLOCK RESET ERROR T RIP START ALARM en05000329.vsd

Figure 134:

OEX function block

7.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 139:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK RESET

Input signals for the OEXPVPH (OEX1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input External block Reset operation

Table 140:
Signal ERROR TRIP START ALARM

Output signals for the OEXPVPH (OEX1-) function block


Description General function error Trip from overexcitation function Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous) Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

7.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 141:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase MeasuredU

Parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH (OEX1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Ph-Ph Pos Seq Step 1 0.05 Default Off 3000 400.00 Ph-Ph Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current (rated phase current) Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Input voltage selection (pos. seq/ one phase-to-phase)

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

267

Section 7 Voltage protection


Parameter V/Hz> Range 100.0 - 180.0 Step 0.1 Default 110.0 Unit %UB/f Description Operate level of V/Hz at no load & rated freq in % of Ubase High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of Ubase Winding reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec Alarm operate level as % of the trip level Alarm time delay, in sec

V/Hz>>

100.0 - 200.0

0.1

140.0

%UB/f

XLeak TrPulse tMin

0.000 - 200.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.100 7.000

ohm s s

tMax

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

tCooling

0.10 - 9000.00

0.01

1200.00

CurveType

IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60

IEEE

kForIEEE

t1Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

7200.00

t2Tailor t3Tailor t4Tailor t5Tailor t6Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01

3600.00 1800.00 900.00 450.00 225.00

s s s s s

AlarmLevel tAlarm

50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00

0.1 0.01

100.0 5.00

% s

7.4.6

Technical data

268

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 142:
Function

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)


Range or value (100180)% of (Ubase/frated) (50120)% of start level (100200)% of (Ubase/frated) IEEE or customer defined Accuracy 1.0% of U 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of U Class 5 + 40 ms

Operate value, start Operate value, alarm Operate value, high level Curve type

IEEE : t =

(0.18 k ) ( M - 1) 2

where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/ (Ur/fr) Minimum time delay for inverse function Maximum time delay for inverse function Alarm time delay (0.00060.000) s (0.009000.00) s (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

269

270

Section 8 Frequency protection

Section 8

Frequency protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

8.1

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)


Function block name: TUFx-ANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

f<

8.1.1

Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network. The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine start-up etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to two independent under frequency steps are available.

8.1.2

Principle of operation
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency. The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

271

Section 8 Frequency protection

8.1.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".

8.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the time delay, see figure 135and figure 136. For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 137 and equation 66. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

272

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

tReset Frequency START Hysteresis tReset Measured Frequency

TRIP

StartFrequency

Time START TRIP


tTRip

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000721.vsd

Figure 135:

Frequency profile not causing a reset of the start signal

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

273

Section 8 Frequency protection

Frequency START

tReset START Hysteresis TRIP

tReset Measured Frequency

StartFrequency

Time START TRIP


tTrip

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000723.vsd

Figure 136:

Frequency profile causing a reset of the start signal

8.1.2.3

Voltage dependent time delay


Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 66. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 66)

where: t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),

274

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

U Exponent tMax, tMin

is the measured voltage is a setting, are time settings.

UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 137, for:


UMin UNom tMax tMin Exponent = 90% = 100% = 1.0 s = 0.0 s = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

TimeDlyOperate [s]

Exponenent 3
0.5

1 2

90

95

100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd

Figure 137:

Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.

8.1.2.4

Blocking
The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

275

Section 8 Frequency protection


8.1.2.5 Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 138.

Block OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset START TRIP Start & Trip Output Logic START

Frequency

Comparator f < StartFrequency

TRIP

100 ms Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000726.vsd

Figure 138:

Schematic design of the underfrequency function

8.1.3

Function block
TUF1SAPTUF U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN en05000326.vsd

Figure 139:

TUF function block

276

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection 8.1.4 Input and output signals


Table 143:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 144:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN

Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block


Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

8.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 145:
Parameter Operation UBase

Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV. Frequency setting/ start value. Operate time delay. Restore time delay. Restore frequency level after operation. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer.

StartFrequency tTrip TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq TimerOperation UNom

35.00 - 75.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00 Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150

0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01 1

48.80 0.200 0.000 50.10 Definite timer 100

Hz s s Hz %UB

UMin

50 - 150

90

%UB

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

277

Section 8 Frequency protection


Parameter Exponent Range 1.0 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 - 5.0 Unit Description For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.

tMax

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

tMin

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Table 146:
Parameter IntBlkStVal tReset

Advanced parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function


Range 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 0.001 Default 50 0.000 Unit %UB s Description Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Time delay for reset.

8.2

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)


Function block name: TOFx-ANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTOF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

f>

8.2.1

Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause overfrequency. The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to six independent frequency steps are available.

8.2.2

Principle of operation
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the

278

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

8.2.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".

8.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tTrip, see figure 140 and figure 141. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

279

Section 8 Frequency protection

tReset Frequency START StartFrequency tReset TRIP

Hysteresis

Measured Frequency

Time START
tTrip

TRIP

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000732.vsd

Figure 140:

Frequency profile not causing a reset of the start signal

280

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Frequency START StartFrequency

tReset START Hysteresis TRIP

tReset

Measured Frequency

Time START TRIP


tTrip

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000733.vsd

Figure 141:

Frequency profile causing a reset of the start signal

8.2.2.3

Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK: TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TOF-TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.2.2.4

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

281

Section 8 Frequency protection

power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 142.

BLOCK BLKTRIP Comparator U < IntBlockLevel OR BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator Definite Time Delay START Comparator f > StartFrequency

Start & Trip Output Logic

START

Frequency

TimeDlyOperate TRIP TimeDlyReset TRIP

en05000735.vsd

Figure 142:

Schematic design of the overfrequency function

8.2.3

Function block
T OF1SAPTOF U3P BLOCK BLKT RIP T RIP ST ART BLKDMAGN en05000325.vsd

Figure 143:

TOF function block

8.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 147:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP

Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output.

282

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Table 148:
Signal TRIP START BLKDMAGN

Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block


Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

8.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 149:
Parameter Operation UBase

Parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV. Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay. Time delay for reset.

StartFrequency IntBlkStVall tTrip tReset

35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 1 0.001 0.001

51.20 50 0.000 0.000

Hz %UB s s

8.3

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)


Function block name: RCFx-ANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPFRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

df/dt > <

8.3.1

Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action schemes etc.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

283

Section 8 Frequency protection

The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency. Up to six independent rate-of-change frequency steps are available.

8.3.2

Principle of operation
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

8.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included, see section "Inverse characteristics".

8.3.2.2

Time delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time. Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a

284

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area, see figure 144-147. The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

285

Section 8 Frequency protection

Rate-of-Change of Frequency Time tReset tReset START Hysteresis Measured Rate-ofChange of Frequency TRIP

StartFreqGrad

START TRIP

tTrip

Time Integrator tTrip

en05000727.vsd

Time

Figure 144:

Rate-of-change of frequency profile, set for frequency decrease conditions, not causing a reset of the start signal

286

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Rate-of-Change of Frequency Time tReset START START Hysteresis TRIP StartFreqGrad

tReset Measured Rate-of-Change of Frequency

START TRIP

tTrip

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000728.vsd

Figure 145:

Frequency profile, set for frequency decrease conditions, causing a reset of the start signal

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

287

Section 8 Frequency protection

Rate-of-Change of Frequency START StartFreqGrad

tReset tReset TRIP

Hysteresis

Measured Rate-ofChange of Frequency

Time START
tTrip

TRIP

Time Integrator tTrip

en05000729.vsd

Time

Figure 146:

Rate-of-change of frequency profile, set for frequency increase conditions, not causing a reset of the start signal

288

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Rate-of-Change of Frequency START StartFreqGrad

tReset START Hysteresis TRIP

tReset

Measured Rate-of-Change of Frequency

Time START TRIP


tTrip

Time Integrator tTrip

Time
en05000730.vsd

Figure 147:

Frequency profile, set for frequency increase conditions, causing a reset of the start signal

8.3.2.3

Blocking
The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

289

Section 8 Frequency protection

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.3.2.4

Design
The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency function is schematically described in figure 148.

BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel Start & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Rate-of-Change of Frequency

Comparator If [StartFreqGrad<0 START AND df/dt < StartFreqGrad] OR [StartFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > StartFreqGrad] Then START

Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset

START

TRIP

100 ms Frequency Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000835.vsd

Figure 148:

Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function

290

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 8 Frequency protection 8.3.3 Function block


RCF1SAPFRC U3P BLOCK BLKT RIP BLKREST T RIP ST ART REST ORE BLKDMAGN en05000322.vsd

Figure 149:

RCF function block

8.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 150:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 151:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN

Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block


Description Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude

8.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 152:
Parameter Operation UBase

Parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function


Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase.

StartFreqGrad

-10.00 - 10.00

0.01

0.50

Hz/s

IntBlockLevel

0 - 100

50

%UB

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

291

Section 8 Frequency protection


Parameter tTrip Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.200 Unit s Description Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

0.01

49.90

Hz

tRestore tReset

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

s s

8.3.6

Technical data
Table 153:
Function Operate value, start function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, start function

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)


Range or value (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s (0-100)% of Ubase 100 ms typically Accuracy 10.0 mHz/s 1.0% of Ur -

292

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Section 9

Multipurpose protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

9.1

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)


Function block name: GFxxANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21, 40 IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I<

I>

IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC

U<

U>

9.1.1

Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults. The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault protection function.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

293

Section 9 Multipurpose protection 9.1.2


9.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measured quantities within the function
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 154.
Table 154: Current selection for the GF function

Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

10

Phase1-Phase2

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 155: 294 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Table 155:

Voltage selection for the GF function


Comment GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1) GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

Set value for the parameter

VoltageInput
1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq

-3ZeroSeq

7 8 9

MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh

10

Phase1-Phase2

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 155 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

295

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 156 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 156: Restraint current selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude

Set value for the parameter RestrCurr 1 2 3 4 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh

9.1.2.2

Base quantities for GF function


The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every GF function. Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 154. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 154.

Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 155. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 155.

9.1.2.3

Built-in overcurrent protection steps


Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 154) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

296

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 154). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected: PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current) NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 154) and measured voltage phasor (see table 155). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 155) and measured current phasor (see table 154) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria. Table 157 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 157: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Comment Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.) Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Directional feature

Set value for the Set value for the parameter CurrentInput parameter

VoltageInput
PosSeq

PosSeq

NegSeq

-NegSeq

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Phase1 Phase2 Phase3

Phase2-Phase3 Phase3-Phase1 Phase1-Phase2

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

297

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 150).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line


en05000252.vsd

Figure 150:
where:

I & U directional operating principle for the GF function

RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

298

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 150).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line

en05000253.vsd

Figure 151:
where: RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

GF, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 155). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint/control feature

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

299

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)


OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude


en05000324.vsd

Figure 152:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude


en05000323.vsd

Figure 153:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will 300 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions). The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 156). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

Current restraint feature

IMeasured
te ra

ea ar

pe O

IsetHigh

eff Co r t es I>R

tr es *I r

ain

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd

Figure 154:

Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.4

Built-in undercurrent protection steps


Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 154) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

301

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.

9.1.2.5

Built-in overvoltage protection steps


Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 155) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.6

Built-in undervoltage protection steps


Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 155 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.7

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following figures.

302

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

REx670
ADM PGPF function
Current and voltage selection settings

Phasor calculation of individual currents

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasors & samples

Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements

Selected current Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual voltages

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors & samples

en05000169.vsd

Figure 155:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function

Figure 155 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts. 1. 2. 3. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function: 1. 2. 3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured current. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured voltage. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured restraint current.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

303

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1 2
Selected current
nd

Harmonic restraint

TRUC1

UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STUC2 TRUC2

STOC1 TROC1 BLK2ND DIROC1

Selected restraint current

OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STOC2 TROC2

UDIRLOW DIROC2

STOV1

OV1

TROV1 STOV2

OV2
Selected voltage

TROV2 STUV1

UV1

TRUV1 STUV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd

Figure 156:

PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements

304

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 156 can be summarized as follows: 1. 2. 3. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output signals. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable second harmonic

Second harmonic check

DEF time selected

DEF
OR

BLKTROC 1

AND

TROC1

Selected current

a b

a>b

OC1=On BLKOC1

StartCurr_OC1

AND

STOC1

Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Current Restraint Feature Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

Figure 157:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

305

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

a b

b>a

DEF

AND

TRUC1

StartCurr_UC1

AND

Operation_UC1=On Bin input: BLKUC1

STUC1

en05000750.vsd

Figure 158:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)

DEF time selected Selected voltage


a b

DEF

BLKTROV1

AND

TROV1

OR
a>b

StartVolt_OV1

AND
Inverse

STOV1

Operation_OV1=On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected

en05000751.vsd

Figure 159:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)

306

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

DEF time selected Selected voltage


a b

DEF OR

BLKTRUV 1

AND

TRUV1

b>a

StartVolt_UV1

AND Inverse

STUV1

Operation_UV1=On BLKUV1 Inverse time selected

en05000752.vsd

Figure 160:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)

9.1.3

Function block
GF01CVGAPC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE en05000372.vsd

Figure 161:

GF function block

9.1.4

Input and output signals

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

307

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Table 158:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR

Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of over current function OC1 Block of trip for over current function OC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1 Block of over current function OC2 Block of trip for over current function OC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2 Block of under current function UC1 Block of trip for under current function UC1 Block of under current function UC2 Block of trip for under current function UC2 Block of over voltage function OV1 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 Block of over voltage function OV2 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 Block of under voltage function UV1 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 Block of under voltage function UV2 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 159:
Signal TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1

Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block


Description General trip signal Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2 General start signal Start signal from overcurrent function OC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1

Table continued on next page

308

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Signal STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE Description Start signal from undercurrent function UC2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2 Block from second harmonic detection Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Low voltage for directional polarization Measured current value Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi) Measured voltage value Angle between voltage and current

9.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 160:
Parameter Operation CurrentInput

Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function


Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 Step Default Off MaxPh Unit Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function

IBase

3000

Base Current

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

309

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter VoltageInput Range phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Step Default MaxPh Unit Description Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function

UBase OperHarmRestr

0.05 -

400.00 Off

kV -

Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyse disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase

l_2nd/l_fund

1.0

20.0

BlkLevel2nd

10 - 5000

5000

%IB

EnRestrainCurr

Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0

Off

RestrCurrInput

PosSeq

RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM

0.01 1 1 0.1

0.00 - 5.00 -75 75 0.5

Deg Deg %UB

Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1

Off On 2.0 - 5000.0

1.0

Off 120.0

%IB

Table continued on next page

310

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter CurveType_OC1 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

tDef_OC1

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)

k_OC1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

tMin_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

VCntrlMode_OC1

Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00

Off

VDepMode_OC1

Step

VDepFact_OC1

0.01

0.02 - 5.00

ULowLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

50.0

%UB

UHighLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

100.0

%UB

HarmRestr_OC1

Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory

Off

DirMode_OC1

Non-directional

DirPrinc_OC1

I&U

ActLowVolt1_VM

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

311

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2 Range Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 1.0 Default Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time Unit %IB Description Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

tDef_OC2

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2

k_OC2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

tMin_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

VCntrlMode_OC2

Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00

Off

VDepMode_OC2

Step

VDepFact_OC2

0.01

0.02 - 5.00

ULowLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

50.0

%UB

UHighLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

100.0

%UB

HarmRestr_OC2

Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U

Off

DirMode_OC2

Non-directional

DirPrinc_OC2

I&U

Table continued on next page

312

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter ActLowVolt2_VM Range Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1

Off Off

BlkLowCurr_UC1

20

%IB

StartCurr_UC1

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

tResetDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

HarmRestr_UC1

Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150

Off

Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2

Off Off

BlkLowCurr_UC2

20

%IB

StartCurr_UC2

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

HarmRestr_UC2

Off On Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

Off

Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1

0.1 -

Off 150.0 Definite time

%UB -

tDef_OV1

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

313

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter tMin_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.05 Unit s Description Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

k_OV1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2

Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

0.1 -

Off 150.0 Definite time

%UB -

tDef_OV2

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase

tMin_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_OV2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1

Off On 2.0 - 150.0

0.1

Off 50.0

%UB

CurveType_UV1

Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

Definite time

tDef_UV1

0.01

1.00

tMin_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_UV1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

EnBlkLowV_UV1

Off On 0.0 - 5.0

On

BlkLowVolt_UV1

0.1

0.5

%UB

Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2

Off On 2.0 - 150.0

0.1

Off 50.0

%UB

Table continued on next page

314

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter CurveType_UV2 Range Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Definite time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for UV2 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase

tDef_UV2

0.01

1.00

tMin_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_UV2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

EnBlkLowV_UV2

Off On 0.0 - 5.0

On

BlkLowVolt_UV2

0.1

0.5

%UB

Table 161:
Parameter CurrMult_OC1

Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function


Range 2.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 - 10.0 Unit Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1

ResCrvType_OC1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC1

0.01

0.00

P_OC1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

A_OC1

0.140

0.001

0.000 - 999.000

B_OC1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 99.000

C_OC1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

PR_OC1

0.500

0.001

0.005 - 3.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

315

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter TR_OC1 Range 13.500 Step 0.001 Default 0.005 - 600.000 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1

CR_OC1

1.0

0.1

0.1 - 10.0

CurrMult_OC2

2.0

0.1

1.0 - 10.0

ResCrvType_OC2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC2

0.01

0.00

P_OC2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

A_OC2

0.140

0.001

0.000 - 999.000

B_OC2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 99.000

C_OC2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

PR_OC2

0.500

0.001

0.005 - 3.000

TR_OC2

13.500

0.001

0.005 - 600.000

CR_OC2

1.0

0.1

0.1 - 10.0

tResetDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

ResCrvType_OV1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV1

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1

Table continued on next page

316

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter tResetIDMT_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit s Description Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2

A_OV1

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_OV1

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_OV1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_OV1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_OV1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

ResCrvType_OV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV2

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2

tResetIDMT_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_OV2

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_OV2

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_OV2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_OV2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_OV2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

317

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter ResCrvType_UV1 Range Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Selection of reset curve type for UV1

tResetDef_UV1

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2

tResetIDMT_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_UV1

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_UV1

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_UV1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_UV1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_UV1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

ResCrvType_UV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_UV2

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2

tResetIDMT_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_UV2

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_UV2

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

Table continued on next page

318

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Parameter C_UV2 Range 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 1.000 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2

D_UV2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_UV2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

9.1.6

Technical data
Table 162:
Function Measuring current input

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)


Range or value phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (1 - 99999) A phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (0.05 - 2000.00) kV (2 - 5000)% of Ibase (2 - 150)% of Ibase (0.00 - 6000.00) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Accuracy -

Base current Measuring voltage input

Base voltage Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2 Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay Operate time start overcurrent Reset time start overcurrent Operate time start undercurrent Reset time start undercurrent Table continued on next page

1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

319

Section 9 Multipurpose protection


Function See table 436 and table 437 Range or value Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: k: 0.05 - 999.00 A: 0.0000 - 999.0000 B: 0.0000 - 99.0000 C: 0.0000 - 1.0000 P: 0.0001 - 10.0000 PR: 0.005 - 3.000 TR: 0.005 - 600.000 CR: 0.1 - 10.0 (0.0 - 5.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset (1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse (-180 to +180) degrees (1 to 90) degrees > 95% < 105% > 95% < 105% Accuracy See table 436 and table 437

Voltage level where voltage memory takes over Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2 Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, start overvoltage Reset time, start overvoltage Operate time start undervoltage Reset time start undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically

320

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


About this chapter
This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

10.1

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)


Function block name: CCSxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

10.1.1

Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative sequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

10.1.2

Principle of operation
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 162. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

321

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms. The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

Figure 162:

Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 163.

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8 I MinOp

Operation area

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 163:

Operate characteristics

322

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

10.1.3

Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF I3P IREF BLOCK FAIL ALARM

en05000389.vsd

Figure 164:

CCS function block

10.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 163:
Signal I3P IREF BLOCK

Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block


Description Group signal for three phase current input TBD Block of function

Table 164:
Signal FAIL ALARM

Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block


Description Detection of current circuit failure Alarm for current circuit failure

10.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 165:
Parameter Operation IBase

Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Unit A Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase

Ip>Block

5 - 500

150

%IB

IMinOp

5 - 200

20

%IB

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

323

Section 10 Secondary system supervision 10.1.6 Technical data


Table 166:
Function Operate current Block current

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)


Range or value (5-200)% of Ir (5-500)% of Ir Accuracy 10.0% of Ir at I Ir 10.0% of I at I > Ir 5.0% of Ir at I Ir 5.0% of I at I > Ir

10.2

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)


Function block name: FSDxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

10.2.1

Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation

324

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.

10.2.2
10.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Zero sequence
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode. The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: the zero-sequence voltage 3U0 the zero-sequence current 3I0.

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and 3I0>. The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same time. If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>, SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5 seconds. It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open breaker position. Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

325

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes AND

BLOCK BLKTRIP fufailStarted AND

OR

OR All UL less than Uph> AND 3PH

SealIn = On AND 5s t

AND

Any UL less than Uph> Fuse fail detected (3U0 high and 3I0 low for t>3 ms)

OR

fuseFaildetected AND OR AND BLKU

OpMode = 2 setLatch U I deadLineCondition 200 ms t AND OR AND BLKZ

MCBOP

150 ms t 60 sec t AND UN > 3U0> for t>5 s All IL < IDLD< AND

All UL> UPh>

CBCLOSED DISCPOS

en06000394.vsd

Figure 165:

Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based

326

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions: The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate. The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

327

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated at the same time. The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.

10.2.2.2

Negative sequence
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates the negative sequence component of current and voltage. the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to 1 (negative sequence mode).

10.2.2.3

du/dt and di/dt


The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On. When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm. The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following quantities are calculated: The change of voltage DU/Dt The change of current DI/Dt

The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED. There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:

328

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = 1) The magnitude U is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.

The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function. The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase current criterion is introduced. If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 165) and if all measured voltages are low (lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well. If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting UPh> only BLKU will be activated. The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.

10.2.2.4

Operation modes
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.

Negative and zero sequence algorithm

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different operation modes are: OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

329

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter OpDUDI to On or Off.

du/dt and di/dt algorithm

10.2.2.5

Dead line detection


The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 165) is related to the internal dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection for unequal pole closing.

10.2.3

Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF BLOCK I3P U3P CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKSP BLKZ BLKU 3PH

en05000700.vsd

Figure 166:

FSD function block

10.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 167:
Signal BLOCK I3P U3P CBCLOSED Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block


Description Block of function Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Active when circuit breaker is closed

330

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Signal MCBOP DISCPOS BLKSP Description Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Active when line disconnector is open Blocks operation of function when active

Table 168:
Signal BLKZ BLKU 3PH

Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block


Description Start of current and voltage controlled function General start of function Three-phase start of function

10.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 169:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OpMode

Parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 UZsIZs Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings in A Base value for voltage settings in kV Operating mode selection

3U0>

30

%UB

Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/On

3I0<

1 - 100

10

%IB

3U2>

1 - 100

30

%UB

3I2<

1 - 100

10

%IB

OperationDUDI

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

331

Section 10 Secondary system supervision


Parameter DU> Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 60 Unit %UB Description Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of sealin phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase

DI<

1 - 100

15

%IB

UPh>

1 - 100

70

%UB

IPh>

1 - 100

10

%IB

SealIn USealln<

Off On 1 - 100

On 70

%UB

IDLD<

1 - 100

%IB

UDLD<

1 - 100

60

%UB

10.2.6

Technical data
Table 170:
Function Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change level Operate current change level

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)


Range or value (1-100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ur 5.0% of Ir

332

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Section 11 Control
About this chapter
This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

11.1

Synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)


Function block name: SYNxANSI number: 25 IEC 61850 logical node name: SECRSYN IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

sc/vc

11.1.1

Introduction
The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and a half or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings, e.g. the allowed frequency difference can be set to allow wider limits for the auto-reclose attempt than for the manual closing.

11.1.2
11.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

333

Section 11 Control

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the Application manual.

11.1.2.2

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchronism check

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. When the function is set to Operation = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSync and UHighLineSync. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. 334 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 11 Control

TSTAUTSY will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for ARSYNOK. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOK shows that the voltages are high, UDIFF, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.

Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for bus respectively line energizing. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall not exceed a set value. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

335

Section 11 Control

OperationSync = On
AND AND AND AND OR AND AND 0-60 s t tSync AND 0-60 s t tSync2 OR AND

TSTSYNOK

TSTSYNC BLKSYNC BLOCK SelectedFuseOK

SYNOK

AND

UDiff
AND

50 ms t

UHighBusSync UHighLineSync
AND 1

UOK UDIFF FRDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFA PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME

FreqDiffA FreqDiffM PhaseDiffA PhaseDiffM voltageDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue phaseAngleDifferenceValue

1 1 1 1

PHDIFFME
en05000790.vsd

Figure 167:

Simplified logic diagram for the Synchronism check function

Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision. The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The different alternatives are described below. If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.

336

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage. The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 168.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

337

Section 11 Control

B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD


AND AND

B1SEL B2SEL

1
AND

invalidSelection busVoltage

bus1Voltage bus2Voltage

UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF

OR

AND OR AND AND AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

OR

BLOCK

en05000779.vsd

Figure 168:

Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 11/2 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breakers is described. This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage. The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB). The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

338

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 Circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in 169 and for the tie circuit breaker in 170
LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD B1QOPEN B1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND

LN1SEL

LN2SEL B2SEL invalidSelection

line1Voltage line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF


OR OR OR AND AND

lineVoltage

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

OR

AND

en05000780.vsd

Figure 169:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

339

Section 11 Control

LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD
AND

LN1SEL 1 B1SEL
AND

B1QOPEN B1QCLD
AND

AND

line1Voltage bus1Voltage LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD


AND

busVoltage

LN2SEL 1 B2SEL
AND OR

B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND

invalidSelection

AND

line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

lineVoltage

OR

AND OR AND

OR

AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

OR

AND

en05000781.vsd

Figure 170:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.

11.1.3

Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 171. Tables describing the inputs, outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs in your particular application.

340

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

SYN1SECRSYN U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF TSTENERG TSTSYNC BLKENERG BLKSYNC BLOCK B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL USELFAIL AUTOENOK MANENOK TSTENOK MANSYOK TSTMANSY UDIFF FRDIFFM FRDIFFA PHDIFFM PHDIFFA UOK AUTOSYOK TSTAUTSY

en05000702.vsd

Figure 171:

SYN function block

11.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 171:
Signal U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SECRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input busbar 1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2 Group signal for voltage input line 1 Group signal for voltage input line 2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Bus1 voltage transformer OK Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

341

Section 11 Control
Signal UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF TSTENERG TSTSYNC BLKENERG BLKSYNC BLOCK Description Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Energizing check in test mode Synchrocheck in test mode Energizing check blocked Synchrocheck blocked Block of function

Table 172:
Signal B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL USELFAIL AUTOENOK MANENOK TSTENOK MANSYOK TSTMANSY UDIFF FRDIFFM FRDIFFA PHDIFFM PHDIFFA UOK AUTOSYOK TSTAUTSY

Output signals for the SECRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block


Description Bus1 selected Bus2 selected Line1 selected Line2 selected Selected voltage transformer fuse failed Automatic energizing check OK Manual energizing check OK Energizing check OK test output Manual synchro check OK Manual synchro check OK test output Voltage difference out of limit Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation Voltage amplitudes above set limits Auto synchro check OK Auto synchro check OK test output

11.1.5

Setting parameters

342

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 173:
Parameter Operation SelPhaseBus1

Basic parameter group settings for the SECRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function


Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 0.20 - 5.00 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 Step Default Off phase2 Unit Description Operation Off / On Select phase for bus1

SelPhaseBus2

phase2

Select phase for bus2

SelPhaseLine1

phase2

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

phase2

Select phase for line2

CBConfig

No voltage sel.

Select CB configuration

UBase PhaseShift URatio OperationSync

0.001 5 0.01 -

400.000 0 1.00 On

kV Deg -

Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage difference limit between bus and line in % of UBase Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto

UHighBusSync

1.0

80.0

%UB

UHighLineSync

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

UDiff

2.0 - 50.0

1.0

15.0

%UB

FreqDiffM

0.003 - 1.000

0.001

0.050

Hz

FreqDiffA

0.003 - 1.000

0.001

0.200

Hz

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

343

Section 11 Control
Parameter PhaseDiffM Range 5.0 - 90.0 Step 1.0 Default 25.0 Unit Deg Description Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Time delay output for synchrocheck for Auto operation Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Automatic energizing check mode

PhaseDiffA

5.0 - 90.0

1.0

25.0

Deg

tSyncM tSyncA

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

1.000 0.100

s s

UHighBusEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

UHighLineEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

ULowBusEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%UB

ULowLineEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%UB

AutoEnerg

Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both 0.000 - 60.000

DLLB

ManEnerg

DLLB

Manual energizing check mode

tAutoEnerg

0.001

0.100

Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase

tManEnerg ManEnergDBDL UMaxEnerg

0.000 - 60.000 Off On 80.0 - 140.0

0.001 1.0

0.100 Off 115.0

s %UB

11.1.6

Technical data

344

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 174:
Function

Synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)


Range or value (-180 to 180) degrees (0.20-5.00)% of Ubase (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (0.003-1.000) Hz (5.0-90.0) degrees (2.0-50.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (10.0-80.0)% of Ubase < 105% (80.0-140.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s 160 ms typically 80 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 2.0 mHz 2.0 degrees 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 0.5% 10 ms -

Phase shift, jline - jbus Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline Voltage high limit for synchrocheck Reset ratio, synchrocheck Frequency difference limit between bus and line Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Voltage difference limit between bus and line Time delay output for synchrocheck Voltage high limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchrocheck function Operate time for energizing function

11.2

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)


Function block name: ARx-ANSI number: 79 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMBRREC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

O->I

11.2.1

Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

345

Section 11 Control

Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck function.

11.2.2
11.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality.

11.2.2.2

Auto-reclosing operation Off and On


Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses, for example from a control system. When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).

11.2.2.3

Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle


The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Should it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used. For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for a reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal. To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally

346

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT. The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 172. The following should be considered. Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs etc. Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5. Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.

Operation:On Operation:Off Operation:External Ctrl ON OFF START STARTHS autoInitiate TRSOTF CBREADY CBPOS Additional conditions AND start AND tCBClosedMin t AND Blocking conditions Inhibit condistions count 0
en05000782.vsd

AND AND

OR AND S OR R

SETON

OR OR initiate

120 ms t CB Closed

AND S R

AND

OR

AND

READY

Figure 172:

Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

11.2.2.4

Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1


It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

347

Section 11 Control

and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase highspeed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input STARTHS. An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

11.2.2.5

Long trip signal


In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.
Extended t1

PLCLOST initiate

AND tTrip t

OR

AND

AND

Extend t1

start

AND

AND

long duration (block AR)


en05000783.vsd

Figure 173:

Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can 348 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 11 Control

be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At singlephase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded. By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence. The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given. A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

349

Section 11 Control

t1 1Ph t

"AR Open time" timers


OR

1P2PTO 3PHSTO 3PT1TO 3PT2TO 3PT3TO 3PT4TO 3PT5TO SYNC initiate CBREADY

From logic for reclosing programs

t1 2Ph t t1 3Ph HS t t1 3Ph t

1P2PTO

3PHSTO 3PT1TO Pulse AR

OR

AND OR AND

AND

AND

OR

Blocking AR State Control COUNTER 0 CL 1 2 3 4 R 5

AND

tSync t

Pulse AR (above) TR2P TR3P start initiate Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 LOGIC reclosing programs

OR

AND

tReclaim t Reclaim Timer On

Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5

1PT1 2PT1 3PHS 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 1 PERMIT1P PREP3P Inhibit Y
OR

INPROGR

Y INHIBIT

Blocking

OR

tInhibit t

en05000784.vsd

Figure 174:

Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 175 When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.

350

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

pulse initiate

tPulse **) 50 ms AND OR

CLOSECB

1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 RSTCOUNT **) Only if "CutPulse" = On

AND

counter

COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter

AND

counter counter

en05000785.vsd

Figure 175:

Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Transient fault

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

351

Section 11 Control

initiate block start

AND

OR

AND

UNSUCCL

shot 0 UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing) CBPOS

OR AND

tUnsucCl t

AND

CBclosed

eno5000786.vsd

Figure 176:

Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.
tAutoContWait t

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

AND

CLOSECB
AND

S Q R

AND

CBPOS

CBClosed

OR

START

OR

initiate

en05000787.vsd

Figure 177:

Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is 352 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 11 Control

selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.
StartByCBOpen = On 1 START STARTHS
AND

AND 100 ms AND 100 ms AND

start

en05000788.vsd

Figure 178:

Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"

11.2.2.6

Time sequence diagrams


Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults are shown below in figures 179 to 182.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

353

Section 11 Control

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed

CB READY START SYNC READY INPROG 1PT1 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P SUCCL
Time t1 1Ph tPulse (Trip) tReclaim

en04000196.vsd

Figure 179:

Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open

CB READY START TR3P SYNC READY INPROGR 3PT1 3PT2 ACTIVE CLOSE CB PREP3P UNSUCCL
t1 3Ph (Trip)

Open

t2 3Ph tReclaim tPulse tPulse

Time

en04000197.vsd

Figure 180:

Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

354

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s

en04000198.vsd

Figure 181:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-START AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECB AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim t1s t2

en04000199.vsd

Figure 182:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

355

Section 11 Control 11.2.3 Function block


AR01SMBRREC ON BLOCKED OFF SET ON BLKON READY BLKOFF ACT IVE RESET SUCCL INHIBIT UNSUCCL START INPROGR ST ART HS 1PT1 T RSOT F 2PT1 SKIPHS 3PT1 TR2P 3PT2 TR3P 3PT3 T HOLHOLD 3PT4 CBREADY 3PT5 CBPOS PERMIT 1P PLCLOST PREP3P SYNC CLOSECB WAIT WFMAST ER RST COUNT COUNT 1P COUNT 2P COUNT 3P1 COUNT 3P2 COUNT 3P3 COUNT 3P4 COUNT 3P5 COUNT AR en04000402.vsd

Figure 183:

AR function block

11.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 175:
Signal ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT START STARTHS TRSOTF SKIPHS TR2P TR3P THOLHOLD CBREADY CBPOS PLCLOST SYNC WAIT RSTCOUNT

Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block


Description Switches the AR on (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Switches the AR off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Sets the AR in blocked state Releases the AR from the blocked state Resets the AR to initial conditions Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots. Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred Hold the AR in wait state CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts) Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements) Resets all counters

356

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 176:
Signal BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PERMIT1P PREP3P CLOSECB WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR

Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block


Description The AR is in blocked state The AR operation is switched on, operative Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence Reclosing sequence in progress Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5 Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation Closing command for CB Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5 Counting total number of reclosing shots

11.2.5

Setting parameters

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

357

Section 11 Control

Table 177:
Parameter Operation

Parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function


Range Off External ctrl On 1 2 3 4 5 3 phase 1/2/3ph 1/2ph 1ph+1*2ph 1/2ph+1*3ph 1ph+1*2/3ph Off On NormClosed NormOpen CO OCO 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default External ctrl Unit Description 0 = Off, 1 = ExternalCtrl, 2 = On Max number of reclosing shots 1-5

NoOfShots

FirstShot

1/2/3ph

Restriction of fault type for shot 1

StartByCBOpen

Off

To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for CBPOS input Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/OCO Open time for shot 1, single-phase Open time for shot 1, two-phase Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 2, three-phase Open time for shot 3, three-phase Open time for shot 4, three-phase Open time for shot 5, three-phase Duration of the reclaim time Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK Extended open time for loss of permissive channel Open time extended by this value if Extended t1 is true

CBAuxContType

NormOpen

CBReadyType

CO

t1 1Ph t1 2Ph t1 3Ph t1 3PhHS

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

1.000 1.000 6.000 0.400

s s s s

t2 3Ph t3 3Ph t4 3Ph t5 3Ph tReclaim tSync Extended t1

0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Off On 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 -

30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 60.00 30.00 Off

s s s s s s -

tExtended t1

0.001

0.400

Table continued on next page

358

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Parameter tInhibit tTrip CutPulse tPulse Follow CB Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Off On 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 5.000 0.200 Off 0.200 Off Unit s s s Description Inhibit reclosing reset time Maximum trip pulse duration Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time Min time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing Wait time for CB before indicating unsuccessful/ successful Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/ High Maximum wait time for release from Master

tCBClosedMin

0.01

5.00

AutoCont

Off On 0.000 - 60.000

Off

tAutoContWait

0.001

2.000

UnsucClByCBChk

NoCBCheck CB check Off On 0.00 - 6000.00

NoCBCheck

BlockByUnsucCl

Off

tUnsucCl

0.01

30.00

Priority

None Low High 0.00 - 6000.00

None

tWaitForMaster

0.01

60.00

11.2.6

Technical data

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

359

Section 11 Control

Table 178:
Function

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)


Range or value 1-5 8 (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms

Number of autoreclosing shots Number of autoreclosing programs Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 - t1 1Ph shot 1 - t1 2Ph shot 1 - t1 3PhHS shot 1 - t1 3PhDld shot 2 - t2 shot 3 - t3 shot 4 - t4 shot 5 - t5 Extended autorecloser open time Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync Maximum trip pulse duration Inhibit reset time Reclaim time Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle Circuit breaker closing pulse length CB check time before unsuccessful Wait for master release Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot

(0.00-6000.00) s

(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s

(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s

11.3
11.3.1

Apparatus control (APC)


Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

11.3.2

Principle of operation
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences. Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles

360

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions. Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses. The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI

The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

11.3.3
11.3.3.1

Bay control (QCBAY)


Introduction
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

11.3.3.2

Principle of operation
The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node. The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 361

Section 11 Control

are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards. When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate. To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)". The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to table 179. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 179:
Local panel switch positions 0 = Off 1 = Local 1 = Local 2 = Remote 2 = Remote 3 = Faulty

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions


PSTO value AllPSTOValid (configuration parameter) -FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE -Possible locations that shall be able to operate Not possible to operate Local Panel Local or Remote level without any priority Remote level Local or Remote level without any priority Not possible to operate

0 1 5 2 5 3

Blockings

The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay. The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

362

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires an Control level password. This will be requested at attempt to operate if authority levels has been defined in the IED. Default password is "abb".

11.3.3.3

Function block
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD

en05000796.vsd

Figure 184:

CB function block

11.3.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 180:
Signal LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block


Description External Local/Remote switch is in Off position External Local/Remote switch is in Local position External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position Data representing the L/R switch position is valid Steady signal to block the position updates Steady signal to block the command

Table 181:
Signal PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD

Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block


Description The value for the operator place allocation The update of position is blocked The function is blocked for commands

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

363

Section 11 Control
11.3.3.5 Setting parameters
Table 182:
Parameter AllPSTOValid

General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function


Range Priority No priority Step Default Priority Unit Description The priority of originators

11.3.4
11.3.4.1

Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)


Introduction
The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

11.3.4.2

Principle of operation
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 185, where the inputs on function block LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.

364

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

LR01LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

CB01QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD CB02QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

LR02LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

LRC1LocRemControl PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO10 HMICTR10 PSTO11 HMICTR11 PSTO12 HMICTR12 en05000250.vsd

Figure 185:

Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with two bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The local-remote switching is under strict password control. This is activated by defining an administrator and user with their passwords. Default password i abb. The selected position local-remote or local and remote is indicated by LEDs.

11.3.4.3

Function block
LR01LocalRemote CT RLOFF OFF LOCCT RL LOCAL REMCT RL REMOT E LHMICT RL VALID en05000360.vsd

Figure 186:

LR function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

365

Section 11 Control

LRC1LocRemControl PST O1 HMICT R1 PST O2 HMICT R2 PST O3 HMICT R3 PST O4 HMICT R4 PST O5 HMICT R5 PST O6 HMICT R6 PST O7 HMICT R7 PST O8 HMICT R8 PST O9 HMICT R9 PST O10 HMICT R10 PST O11 HMICT R11 PST O12 HMICT R12 en05000361.vsd

Figure 187:

LRC function block

11.3.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 183:
Signal CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL

Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block


Description Disable control Local in control Remote in control LHMI control

Table 184:
Signal OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID

Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block


Description Control is disabled Local control is activated Remote control is activated Outputs are valid

Table 185:
Signal PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8

Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block


Description PSTO input channel 1 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO input channel 8

Table continued on next page

366

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Signal PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12 Description PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12

Table 186:
Signal HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12

Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block


Description Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

11.3.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 187:
Parameter ControlMode

General settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function


Range Internal LR-switch External LRswitch Step Default Internal LR-switch Unit Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch

11.3.5
11.3.5.1

Switch controller (SCSWI)


Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.

11.3.5.2

Principle of operation

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

367

Section 11 Control

The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence, i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Command handling

Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select is required before execute. In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can be found in table 2. There is not any relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state: switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state

368

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function SXCBR. When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 188. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

369

Section 11 Control

synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 192.
SCSWI EXE_CL OR SXCBR CLOSE

SYNC_OK START_SY SY_INPRO SECRSYN . CB CLOSE Synchro Check Synchronizing function

en05000091.vsd

Figure 188:

Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams

The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.

select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set
en05000092.vsd

Figure 189:

tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

370

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd

Figure 190:

tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 191.
execute command position L1 open close position L2 open close position L3 open close cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *

t1

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.


en05000094.vsd

Figure 191:

tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

371

Section 11 Control

execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchrocheck in 'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd

t1

Figure 192:

tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 188 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard.The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 188:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35

Error handling

Values for "cause" signal in priority order


Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

372

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.3.5.3 Function block
CS01SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT

en05000337.vsd

Figure 193:

CS function block

11.3.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 189:
Signal BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3

Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block


Description Block of function Operator place selection Select signal from local panel Open signal from local panel Close signal from local panel Used for local automation function Used for local automation function Steady signal for block of the command Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made Reservation is made externally Synchronizing function in progress Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck Enables open operation Enables close operation Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

373

Section 11 Control

Table 190:
Signal EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT

Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block


Description Execute command for open direction Execute command for close direction The select conditions are fulfilled Request signal to the reservation function Starts the synchronizing function Position indication Open position indication Closed position indication The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time Commands are blocked Latest value of the error indication during command Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

11.3.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 191:
Parameter CtlModel

General settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function


Range Dir Norm SBO Enh (ABB) Dir Norm (ABB) SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default SBO Enh Unit Description Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Permission to operate depending on the position Max time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Max time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles

PosDependent

Always permitted

tSelect

0.001

30.000

tResResponse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

tSynchrocheck

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

tSynchronizing

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

tExecutionFB

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

30.000

tPoleDiscord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

374

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control 11.3.6


11.3.6.1

Circuit breaker (SXCBR)


Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.6.2

Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 194.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

UE TR

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level


en05000096.vsd

Figure 194:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

375

Section 11 Control

The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 195 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

376

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

EXE_CL Close pulse duration

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 195:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 196 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 196:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

377

Section 11 Control

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 197 .
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd

Figure 197:

Open command with open position indication

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 192 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.

Error handling

378

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 192:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35

Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order


Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

11.3.6.3

Function block
XC01SXCBR GRPConABS1 EXE_OP GRPConABS2 EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN TERVALUE OSEVALUE PENVALUE

en05000338.vsd

Figure 198:

XC function block

11.3.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 193:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block


Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

379

Section 11 Control
Signal BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN Description Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 194:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block


Description Group signal for XCBR output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Truck position indication The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 195:
Parameter tStartMove

General settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function


Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive

0.001 -

0.150 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.200 0.200

s s

380

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control 11.3.7


11.3.7.1

Circuit switch (SXSWI)


Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.7.2

Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 199.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

UE TR

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level


en05000096.vsd

Figure 199:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

381

Section 11 Control

The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 200 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

382

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

EXE_CL Close pulse duration

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 200:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 201 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 201:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. 383

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 11 Control

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 202.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd

Figure 202:

Open command with open position indication

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 196 describes possible values of the "cause" in priority order. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 196:
Cause (value) 0 8 2 24 25

Error handling

Values for "cause" signal in priority order


Description no-error blocked-by-mode blocked-by-switching-hierarchy blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command

Table continued on next page

384

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Cause (value) 9 12 31 32 33 34 35 Description blocked-by-process command-already-in-execution switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

11.3.7.3

Function block
XS01SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE en05000339.vsd

Figure 203:

XS function block

11.3.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 197:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN

Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block


Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

385

Section 11 Control

Table 198:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block


Description Group signal for XSWI output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 199:
Parameter tStartMove

General settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function


Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 3.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Switch Type

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive

0.001 -

15.000 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch

0.001 0.001 -

0.200 0.200 Disconnector

s s -

11.3.8
11.3.8.1

Bay reserve (QCRSV)


Introduction
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation.

386

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.3.8.2 Principle of operation
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV. The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

387

Section 11 Control
Blocking and overriding of reservation

If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE. If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

CR02QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

1 1 1

RES_BAYS

ACK_TO_B

RESERVED

en05000088.vsd

Figure 204:

Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

388

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.3.8.3 Function block
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DAT A RES_GRT 1 RES_GRT 2 RES_GRT 3 RES_GRT 4 RES_GRT 5 RES_GRT 6 RES_GRT 7 RES_GRT 8 RES_BAYS ACK_T O_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT en05000340.vsd

Figure 205:

CR function block

11.3.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 200:
Signal EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA

Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block


Description Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset Signal to override the reservation Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 201:
Signal RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7

Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block


Description Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

389

Section 11 Control
Signal RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT Description Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

11.3.8.5

Setting parameters
Table 202:
Parameter tCancelRes

General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function


Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8

ParamRequest1

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest2

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest3

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest4

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest5

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest6

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest7

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest8

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

390

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control 11.3.9


11.3.9.1

Reservation input (RESIN)


Introduction
The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).

11.3.9.2

Principle of operation
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 206 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN INT BIN

& FutureUse 1

ACK_F_B

BAY_ACK

ANY_ACK

& BAY_VAL 1

VALID_TX

RE_RQ_B

BAY_RES

& 1 V _RE_RQ

BIN INT

EXCH_OUT

en05000089.vsd

Figure 206:

Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 207 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 391

Section 11 Control

has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay 1

Bay 2

RE02RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT REnnRESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay n

CR01QCRSV RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd

Figure 207:

Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

11.3.9.3

Function block
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT en05000341.vsd

Figure 208:

RE function block

11.3.9.4

Input and output signals


Table 203:
Signal BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES

Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block


Description Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay

392

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 204:
Signal ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block


Description All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

11.3.9.5

Setting parameters
Table 205:
Parameter FutureUse

General settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function


Range Bay in use Bay future use Step Default Bay in use Unit Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

11.4
11.4.1

Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the installation at any given time.

11.4.2

Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

393

Section 11 Control

interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it. The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 209.
Interlocking modules in other bays Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Interlocking module

Apparatus control modules


SCILO SCSWI SXCBR

Apparatus control modules


en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Figure 209:

Interlocking module on bay level.

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Unearthed busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid

394

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Figure 210 illustrates the data exchange principle.


Station bus
Bay 1 Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bay n Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bus coupler WA1 unearthed WA1 unearthed WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

... ..

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 WA2 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9
en05000494.vsd

QB1

QB2

QC1

QC2

QA1

Figure 210:

Data exchange between interlocking modules.

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are always identical. Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/ voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

395

Section 11 Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

11.4.3
11.4.3.1

Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)


Introduction
The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

11.4.3.2

Principle of operation
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One instance per switching device is needed.

396

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

POSOPEN POSCLOSE

SCILO =1
1 &

EN_OPEN >1

&

OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
& &

>1

EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd

Figure 211:

SCILO function logic diagram

11.4.3.3

Function block
CI01SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

en05000359.vsd

Figure 212:

CI function block

11.4.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 206:
Signal POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN

Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block


Description Open position of switch device Closed position of switch device Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 207:
Signal EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block


Description Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

397

Section 11 Control 11.4.4


11.4.4.1

Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)


Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 213. The module can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7

en04000478.vsd

Figure 213:

Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

398

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.4.2 Function block
IF01ABC_LINE QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QB7_OP QB7REL QB7_CL QB7IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L QC11_OP QB1OPT R QC11_CL QB1CLT R QC21_OP QB2OPT R QC21_CL QB2CLT R QC71_OP QB7OPT R QC71_CL QB7CLT R BB7_D_OP QB12OPT R BC_12_CL QB12CLT R BC_17_OP VPQB1T R BC_17_CL VPQB2T R BC_27_OP VPQB7T R BC_27_CL VPQB12T R VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 en05000357.vsd

Figure 214:

IF function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

399

Section 11 Control
11.4.4.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 ABC_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB9 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL &
1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

&

en04000527.vsd

400

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1

&

1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1EX3

&

en04000528.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

401

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES

&

1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

en04000529.vsd

402

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQC9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 QC9_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

403

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 QA1_CL QB2_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX3 VPQC9 VPQC71 QC9_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX4 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB9 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB9_OP VPQB7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB7_OP QB9_OP VOLT_OFF

&

>1

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL

en04000531.vsd

404

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 >1 &

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd

11.4.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 208:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP Table continued on next page

Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

405

Section 11 Control
Signal QC71_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 Description Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

406

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 209:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

11.4.5
11.4.5.1

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)


Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 215. The module can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

407

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7

QC2

en04000514.vsd

Figure 215:

Switchyard layout ABC_BC

11.4.5.2

Function block
IG01ABC_BC QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBT R_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBT R VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPIT L QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QB7REL QB7IT L QB20REL QB20IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB220OT R QB220CT R QB7OPT R QB7CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R BC12OPT R BC12CLT R BC17OPT R BC17CLT R BC27OPT R BC27CLT R VPQB1T R VQB220T R VPQB7T R VPQB12T R VPBC12T R VPBC17T R VPBC27T R

en05000350.vsd

Figure 216:

IG function block

408

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.5.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB20 QB20_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL ABC_BC =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

&

en04000533.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

409

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000534.vsd

410

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000535.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

411

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB20 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QA1_OP QB20_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES QB7_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QC2_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX2 VPQA1 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB7_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB20_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QC2_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB20_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB20REL QB20ITL

&

en04000536.vsd

412

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB20_OP QB7_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB20_OP QB2_OP VPQB20 VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB20_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB7 QA1_OP QB2_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB7

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

& &

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB220OTR QB220CTR VQB220TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR VPBC17TR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR
en04000537.vsd

>1 & >1 & >1 & >1 &

11.4.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 210:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

413

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB20 is in open position QB20 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

414

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 211:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block


Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QB20 is allowed Switching of QB20 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 and QB20 are in open position QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

415

Section 11 Control
Signal VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR Description Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid

11.4.6
11.4.6.1

Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)


Introduction
The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 217. The module is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2

T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4


QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking

en04000515.vsd

Figure 217:

Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

416

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.6.2 Function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 IE01AB_TRAFO QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB2OPT R QB2CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R VPQB1T R VPQB2T R VPQB12T R

en05000358.vsd

Figure 218:

IE function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

417

Section 11 Control
11.4.6.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 QA1_EX2 QC3_OP QA1_EX3 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QA1_EX1 AB_TRAFO =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 &
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 VPQC11 VPQC21 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

>1 &

en04000538.vsd

418

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000539.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

419

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000540.vsd

420

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB3 VPQB4 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB3_OP QB4_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR


en04000541.vsd

>1 &

11.4.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 212:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB3 is in open position QB3 is in closed position QB4 is in open position QB4 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

421

Section 11 Control
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 Description A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 213:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

422

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control 11.4.7


11.4.7.1

Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)


Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 219. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1

QB1 QA1

QB2

QC2

QC3

QC4

A1A2_BS

en04000516.vsd

Figure 219:

Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

11.4.7.2

Function block
IH01A1A2_BS QA1_OP QA1OPREL QA1_CL QA1OPIT L QB1_OP QA1CLREL QB1_CL QA1CLIT L QB2_OP QB1REL QB2_CL QB1IT L QC3_OP QB2REL QC3_CL QB2IT L QC4_OP QC3REL QC4_CL QC3IT L S1QC1_OP QC4REL S1QC1_CL QC4IT L S2QC2_OP S1S2OPT R S2QC2_CL S1S2CLT R BBT R_OP QB1OPT R VP_BBT R QB1CLT R EXDU_12 QB2OPT R EXDU_ES QB2CLT R QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2T R QA1O_EX2 VPQB1T R QA1O_EX3 VPQB2T R QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000348.vsd

Figure 220:

IH function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

423

Section 11 Control
11.4.7.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 A1A2_BS =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

& & >1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000542.vsd

424

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S2QC2_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QC4_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QA1_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

>1 &

S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR


en04000543.vsd

11.4.7.4

Input and output signals


Table 214:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

425

Section 11 Control
Signal QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 Description QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 215:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR

Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block


Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2 Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position

Table continued on next page

426

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.8
11.4.8.1

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)


Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 221. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1

QC2

A1A2_DC

en04000492.vsd

Figure 221:

Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

11.4.8.2

Function block
II01A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 QBOPREL QBOPIT L QBCLREL QBCLIT L DCOPT R DCCLT R VPDCT R

en05000349.vsd

Figure 222:

II function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

427

Section 11 Control
11.4.8.3 Logic diagram
A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS1_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS2_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 =1 VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR =1 =1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2

&

>1
1

QBOPREL QBOPITL

&

&

en04000544.vsd

428

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

11.4.8.4

Input and output signals


Table 216:
Signal QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3

Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block


Description QB is in open position QB is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2 External close condition for section disconnector QB External close condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

429

Section 11 Control

Table 217:
Signal QBOPREL QBOPITL QBCLREL QBCLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR

Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block


Description Opening of QB is allowed Opening of QB is forbidden Closing of QB is allowed Closing of QB is forbidden The bus section disconnector is in open position The bus section disconnector is in closed position Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

11.4.9
11.4.9.1

Interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES)


Introduction
The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 223.

QC

en04000504.vsd

Figure 223:

Switchyard layout BB_ES

11.4.9.2

Function block
IJ01BB_ES QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

en05000347.vsd

Figure 224:

IJ function block

430

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.9.3 Logic diagram
BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB QC_OP QC_CL QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

&

11.4.9.4

Input and output signals


Table 218:
Signal QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB

Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block


Description Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position All disconnectors on this busbar part are open Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 219:
Signal QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block


Description Switching of QC is allowed Switching of QC is forbidden QC on this busbar part is in open position QC on this busbar part is in closed position

11.4.10
11.4.10.1

Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)


Introduction
The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 225.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

431

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4

DB_LINE

en04000518.vsd

Figure 225:

Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars.

11.4.10.2

Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB61REL QB1_CL QB61ITL QB61_OP QB1REL QB61_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QB1OPTR QC3_CL QB1CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 en05000354.vsd

Figure 226:

IB function block

432

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

IA01DB_LINE QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

en05000356.vsd

Figure 227:

IA function block

IC01DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2CLREL QA2_CL QA2CLITL QB2_OP QB62REL QB2_CL QB62ITL QB62_OP QB2REL QB62_CL QB2ITL QC4_OP QC4REL QC4_CL QC4ITL QC5_OP QC5REL QC5_CL QC5ITL QC3_OP QB2OPTR QC3_CL QB2CLTR QC21_OP VPQB2TR QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000355.vsd

Figure 228:

IC function block

11.4.10.3

Logic diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

433

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2

DB_BUS_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000547.vsd

434

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQB61 VPQB1 QB61_OP QB1_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR


en04000548.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

435

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1

DB_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1


1

VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB62 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQB9 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL

&

en04000549.vsd

436

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VPQC3 VPQC9 QC3_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX5

&

>1

&

&

&

en04000550.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

437

Section 11 Control

VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQB9 QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_OP VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF

&
1

QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd

438

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

QA2_OP QA2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2

DB_BUS_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA2 VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

en04000552.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

439

Section 11 Control

VPQB62 VPQB2 QB62_OP QB2_OP QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2

&

1 1

QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR


en04000553.vsd

11.4.10.4

Input and output signals


Table 220:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2

Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 221:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL

Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed

Table continued on next page

440

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB61ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR Description Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 222:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1

Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

441

Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 223:
Signal QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block


Description Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden

Table 224:
Signal QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2

Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block


Description QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

442

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 225:
Signal QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block


Description Closing of QA2 is allowed Closing of QA2 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden Switching of QC5 is allowed Switching of QC5 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.11
11.4.11.1

Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB diameter (BH)


Introduction
The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 229.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

443

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1

QB61

QA1

QB62

QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2

QB9 QC9

BH_CONN en04000513.vsd

Figure 229:

Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout.

11.4.11.2

Function blocks

444

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

IL01BH_LINE_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB1OPTR CQA1_CL QB1CLTR CQB61_OP VPQB1TR CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000352.vsd

Figure 230:

IL function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

445

Section 11 Control

IM01BH_LINE_B QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3IT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L CQA1_OP QB2OPT R CQA1_CL QB2CLT R CQB62_OP VPQB2T R CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000353.vsd

Figure 231:

IM function block

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2

IK01BH_CONN QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

en05000351.vsd

Figure 232:

IK function block

11.4.11.3
446

Logic diagrams
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB61 VPQC11 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000554.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

447

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB61 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000555.vsd

448

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

CQB61_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR


en04000556.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

449

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB62 VPQC21 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000557.vsd

450

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB62 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000558.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

451

Section 11 Control

CQB62_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR


en04000559.vsd

452

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP

BH_CONN =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1


1 1

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL


en04000560.vsd

11.4.11.4

Input and output signals

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

453

Section 11 Control

Table 226:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4

Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continued on next page

454

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 227:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 228:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP

Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

455

Section 11 Control
Signal QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 229:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden

Table continued on next page

456

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR Description Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 230:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2

Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block


Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 on line 1 is in open position QC3 on line 1 is in closed position QC3 on line 2 is in open position QC3 on line 2 is in closed position External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

457

Section 11 Control

Table 231:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block


Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden

11.5
11.5.1

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (GGIO)
Introduction
The Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (LSR, or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used within the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

11.5.2

Principle of operation
The selector switch can be operated either from the control menu on the Local HMI or with logic prepared in the configuration. The LSR has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation.

458

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control

Repeated down or up when end position has been reached will give repeated pulses on the selected step. This can e.g. be used to have multiple activations on two position switches. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. The LSR function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions names are fully settable by the user.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

459

Section 11 Control 11.5.3 Function block


SL01SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN INSTNAME NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 en05000658.vsd

Figure 233:

LRS1 function block, example for LRS1-LRS6

460

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 11 Control 11.5.4 Input and output signals


Table 232:
Signal BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN

Input signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block


Description Block of function. Operator place selection. Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command

Table 233:
Signal SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28

Output signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block


Description Selector switch position 1 Selector switch position 2 Selector switch position 3 Selector switch position 4 Selector switch position 5 Selector switch position 6 Selector switch position 7 Selector switch position 8 Selector switch position 9 Selector switch position 10 Selector switch position 11 Selector switch position 12 Selector switch position 13 Selector switch position 14 Selector switch position 15 Selector switch position 16 Selector switch position 17 Selector switch position 18 Selector switch position 19 Selector switch position 20 Selector switch position 21 Selector switch position 22 Selector switch position 23 Selector switch position 24 Selector switch position 25 Selector switch position 26 Selector switch position 27 Selector switch position 28

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

461

Section 11 Control
Signal SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN NAME01 NAME02 NAME03 NAME04 NAME05 NAME06 NAME07 NAME08 NAME09 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 Description Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer). User define string for position 1 User define string for position 2 User define string for position 3 User define string for position 4 User define string for position 5 User define string for position 6 User define string for position 7 User define string for position 8 User define string for position 9 User define string for position 10 User define string for position 11 User define string for position 12 User define string for position 13 User define string for position 14 User define string for position 15 User define string for position 16 User define string for position 17 User define string for position 18 User define string for position 19 User define string for position 20 User define string for position 21 User define string for position 22 User define string for position 23 User define string for position 24 User define string for position 25 User define string for position 26 User define string for position 27 User define string for position 28 User define string for position 29 User define string for position 30 User define string for position 31 User define string for position 32

11.5.5
462

Setting parameters
Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 11 Control

Table 234:
Parameter StopAtExtremes

General settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function


Range Disabled Enabled Step Default Disabled Unit Description Stop when min or max position is reached

Table 235:
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay

Parameter group settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function


Range Off On 2 - 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Off 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Unit s s Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady (=1) or pulse (=0) Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s]

11.6
11.6.1

Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)


Introduction
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

11.6.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user outputs) to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

11.6.3

Function block
DP01DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION

en07000200.vsd

Figure 234:

DP function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

463

Section 11 Control 11.6.4 Input and output signals


Table 236:
Signal OPEN CLOSE VALID

Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block


Description Open indication Close indication Valid indication

Table 237:
Signal POSITION

Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block


Description Double point indication

11.6.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

464

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Section 12 Scheme communication


About this chapter
This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and earth fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCOM), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCAL) for the distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (EFC) for the residual overcurrent function. Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any telecommunication. The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting parameters.

12.1

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)


Function block name: ZCOM-ANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.1.1

Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling when included. Logic for loss of load and/or local acceleration in co-operation with autoreclose function is also provided for application where no communication channel is available.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

465

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.1.2 Principle of operation


Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

12.1.2.1

Blocking scheme
The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 235. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 235. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.
CACC CR tCoord

AND

TRIP

en05000512.vsd

Figure 235:

Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

12.1.2.2

Permissive underreach scheme


In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 236.

466

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

CACC CR

tCoord

AND

TRIP

en05000513.vsd

Figure 236:

Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme

The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above.

12.1.2.3

Permissive overreach scheme


In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 236. The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above.

12.1.2.4

Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 237. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

467

Section 12 Scheme communication

CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL

en05000746.vsd

Figure 237:

Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling

12.1.2.5

Intertrip scheme
In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

12.1.2.6

Simplified logic diagram


The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 238.

468

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Unblock = Off CR Unblock = NoRestart Unblock = Restart CRG tSecurit y

AND

OR

CRL CRL

1
200 ms t

t
150 ms

AND AND
LCG

OR

AND

SchemeType = Intertrip CSUR tSendMi n

OR

AND

BLOCK CSBLK CRL Schemetype = Permissive UR

OR

AND

AND

OR

CS

AND
CACC Schemetype = Permissive OR CSOR

tCoord

OR

25 ms t

TRIP

OR

AND

AND
tSendMin

OR AND
SchemeType = Blocking BLKCS

AND

en05000515.vsd

Figure 238:

Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic diagram

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

469

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.1.3 Function block


ZCOMZCPSCH BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG

en05000332.vsd

Figure 239:

ZCOM function block

12.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 238:
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG

Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block


Description Block of function Signal for block of trip output from communication logic Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes Reverse directed distance protection zone signal Permissive distance protection zone signal Overreaching distance protection zone signal Underreaching distance protection zone signal Carrier Signal Received Carrier guard signal received

Table 239:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG

Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block


Description Trip output Carrier Send signal Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal Loss of carrier guard signal

12.1.5

Setting parameters

470

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Table 240:
Parameter Operation SchemeType

Parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function


Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation Off / On Scheme type

tCoord

0.001

0.035

Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

tSendMin Unblock

0.000 - 60.000 Off NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 -

0.100 Off

s -

tSecurity

0.001

0.035

12.1.6

Technical data
Table 241:
Function Scheme type

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)


Range or value Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Off NoRestart Restart Accuracy -

Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Operation mode of unblocking logic

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

12.2

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

471

Section 12 Scheme communication

Function block name: ZCALANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCRWPSCH

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.2.1

Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.

12.2.2
12.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLV to recognize the fault on the parallel line. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 240.

Figure 240:

Current reversal logic

The preventing of sending carrier send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRLV signal to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function. The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.

472

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication


12.2.2.2 Weak end infeed logic
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction). The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 241, when: The functional input CRL is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The latest is usually configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

Figure 241:

Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function

When an echo function is used in both terminals, a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 242.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

473

Section 12 Scheme communication

Figure 242:

Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

12.2.3

Function block
ZCALZCRWPSCH U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO

en05000334.vsd

Figure 243:

ZCAL function block

12.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 242:
Signal U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL

Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of current reversal function Activation of current reversal logic Block of WEI logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

474

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Table 243:
Signal IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO

Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block


Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic Trip of WEI logic in phase L1 Trip of WEI logic in phase L2 Trip of WEI logic in phase L3 Carrier send by WEI logic

12.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 244:
Parameter CurrRev

Parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function


Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition

tPickUpRev tDelayRev

0.001 0.001

0.020 0.060

s s

WEI

Off Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 90

Off

tPickUpWEI UBase UPP<

0.001 0.05 1

0.010 400.00 70

s kV %UB

UPN<

10 - 90

70

%UB

12.2.6

Technical data
Table 245:
Function Detection level phase to neutral voltage Detection level phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Table continued on next page

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (10-90)% of Ubase (10-90)% of Ubase <105% Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

475

Section 12 Scheme communication


Function Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic Range or value (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

12.3

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)


Function block name: ZCLCANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZPLAL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.3.1

Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel. The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

12.3.2
12.3.2.1

Principle of operation
Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 244. This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

476

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Figure 244:

Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous". The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of load acceleration).

12.3.2.2

Loss-of-load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see figure 245. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

477

Section 12 Scheme communication

Figure 245:

Loss of load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.

12.3.3

Function block
ZCLCZCLCPLAL I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC TRZE TRLL

en05000333.vsd

Figure 246:

ZCLC function block

12.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 246:
Signal I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC

Input signals for the ZCLC (ZCLC-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Block of function Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension Breaker Close Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load

478

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Table 247:
Signal TRZE TRLL

Output signals for the ZCLC (ZCLC-) function block


Description Trip by zone extension Trip by loss of load

12.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 248:
Parameter Operation IBase LoadCurr

Parameter group settings for the ZCLC (ZCLC-) function


Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 100 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 10 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base setting for current values Load current before disturbance in % of IBase Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load. Enable/Disable operation of Zone extension Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB trip in % of IBase Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR value Time delay on pick-up for load current release Time delay on drop off for load current release

LossOfLoad

Off On Off On 1 - 100

Off

ZoneExtension

Off

MinCurr

%IB

tLowCurr tLoadOn

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.200 0.000

s s

tLoadOff

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

12.4

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)


Function block name: EFC-ANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

479

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.4.1 Introduction


To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels. In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of the protection of 50 60 ms including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance. The communication logic module for directional residual current protection for the REx670 IEDs enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current reversal, included in the EFCA function.

12.4.2

Principle of operation
The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic: CACC: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STFW. CSBLK: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreach step of STRV. CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step. CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

12.4.2.1

Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin. One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero

480

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault. Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weakend-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme. If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

Figure 247:

Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme.

12.4.2.2

Permissive under/overreach scheme


In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth fault measuring element sends a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the communication in each direction. An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode, with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

481

Section 12 Scheme communication

impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping. Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or earth fault protection. In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive). The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR. In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.

12.4.2.3

Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 248. This

482

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.
CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL

en05000746.vsd

Figure 248:

Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CRG disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling

12.4.3

Function block
EFC1ECPSCH BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG

en05000659.vsd

Figure 249:

EFC function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

483

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.4.4 Input and output signals


Table 249:
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG

Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block


Description Block of function Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic Carrier guard signal received

Table 250:
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG

Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block


Description Trip by Communication Scheme Logic Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic loss of carrier guard signal

12.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 251:
Parameter Operation SchemeType

Parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function


Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation Off / On Scheme type, Mode of Operation

tCoord

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

tSendMin Unblock

0.000 - 60.000 Off NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 -

0.100 Off

s -

tSecurity

0.001

0.035

484

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.4.6 Technical data


Table 252:
Function Communication scheme coordination time Scheme type

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)


Range or value (0.000-60.000) s Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms -

12.5

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFCAANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.5.1

Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection. To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication logic. If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used. Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

485

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.5.2


12.5.2.1

Principle of operation
Directional comparison logic function
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme. Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Figure 250 and figure 251 show the logic circuits. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.

12.5.2.2

Fault current reversal logic


The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see figure 250. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme. When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see figure 250. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.

Figure 250:

Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

12.5.2.3

Weak and infeed logic


The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 251 and figure 252.

486

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 251. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weakend-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 251. If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the earthfault function that is in operation.

Figure 251:

Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo.

With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0> The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth-fault function that is in operation.

Figure 252:

Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip.

The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

487

Section 12 Scheme communication 12.5.3 Function block


EFCAECRWPSCH U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR

en05000335.vsd

Figure 253:

EFCA function block

12.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 253:
Signal U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL

Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block


Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of current reversal function Activation of current reversal logic Block of WEI Logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 254:
Signal IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR

Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block


Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic Carrier send by WEI logic POR Carrier signal received from remote end

12.5.5

Setting parameters

488

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 12 Scheme communication

Table 255:
Parameter CurrRev

Parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function


Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition

tPickUpRev tDelayRev

0.001 0.001

0.020 0.060

s s

WEI

Off Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 90

Off

tPickUpWEI UBase UPP<

0.001 0.05 1

0.010 400.00 70

s kV %UB

UPN<

10 - 90

70

%UB

12.5.6

Technical data
Table 256:
Function Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Range or value (5-70)% of Ubase >95% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

489

490

Section 13 Logic

Section 13 Logic
About this chapter
This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

13.1

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)


Function block name: TRPxANSI number: 94 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMPPTRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I->O

13.1.1

Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions. The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.

13.1.2

Principle of operation
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening. For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

491

Section 13 Logic

BLOCK TRIN
Operation Mode = On Program = 3Ph

tTripMin AND t

OR

TRIP

en05000789.vsd

Figure 254:

Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used. The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip, if desired. It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

492

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic
13.1.2.1 Logic diagram
TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF TRIN Program = 3ph

OR OR OR AND
RSTTRIP - cont.

en05000517.vsd

Figure 255:

Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

Figure 256:

Phase segregated front logic

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

493

Section 13 Logic

Figure 257:

Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

494

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic

Figure 258:

Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 259:

Final tripping circuits

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

495

Section 13 Logic 13.1.3 Function block


TRP1SMPPTRC_94 BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT

en05000707.vsd

Figure 260:

TRP function block

13.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 257:
Signal BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT

Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block


Description Block of function Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT) Trip all phases Trip phase 1 Trip phase 2 Trip phase 3 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection Prepare all tripping to be three-phase Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Table 258:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2

Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block


Description General trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2

Table continued on next page

496

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic
Signal TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT Description Trip signal from phase L3 Tripping single-pole Tripping two-pole Tripping three-pole Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

13.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 259:
Parameter Operation Program

Parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function


Range Off On 3 phase 1ph/3ph 1ph/2ph/3ph Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default On 1ph/3ph Unit Description Operation Off / On Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or three ph trip On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch, Off: only outp On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, Off: only inp Minimum duration of trip output signal

TripLockout

Off

AutoLock

Off

tTripMin

0.001

0.150

13.1.6

Technical data
Table 260:
Function Trip action Minimum trip pulse length Timers

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)


Range or value 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

13.2
13.2.1

Trip matrix logic (GGIO, 94X)


Introduction
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals to the different output relays.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

497

Section 13 Logic

The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

13.2.2

Principle of operation
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block. Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules: 1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1". when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2 via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2" when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".

2.

3.

Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 261

498

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic

Figure 261:

Tripping Matrix Internal Logic.

Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately 0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

499

Section 13 Logic 13.2.3 Function block


T R01TRMGGIO INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 INPUT 17 INPUT 18 INPUT 19 INPUT 20 INPUT 21 INPUT 22 INPUT 23 INPUT 24 INPUT 25 INPUT 26 INPUT 27 INPUT 28 INPUT 29 INPUT 30 INPUT 31 INPUT 32 OUT PUT 1 OUT PUT 2 OUT PUT 3

en05000370.vsd

Figure 262:

TR function block

13.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 261:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the TRMGGIO (TR01-) function block


Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10 Binary input 11 Binary input 12 Binary input 13

500

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 Description Binary input 14 Binary input 15 Binary input 16 Binary input 17 Binary input 18 Binary input 19 Binary input 20 Binary input 21 Binary input 22 Binary input 23 Binary input 24 Binary input 25 Binary input 26 Binary input 27 Binary input 28 Binary input 29 Binary input 30 Binary input 31 Binary input 32

Table 262:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3

Output signals for the TRMGGIO (TR01-) function block


Description Binary output 1 Binary output 2 Binary output 3

13.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 263:
Parameter Operation PulseTime1 OnDelayTime1 OffDelayTime1

Parameter group settings for the TRMGGIO (TR01-) function


Range Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default On 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit s s s Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time for output 1 Output on delay time for output 1 Output off delay time for output 1

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

501

Section 13 Logic
Parameter PulseTime2 OnDelayTime2 OffDelayTime2 PulseTime3 OnDelayTime3 OffDelayTime3 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit s s s s s s Description Output pulse time for output 2 Output on delay time for output 2 Output off delay time for output 2 Output pulse time for output 3 Output on delay time for output 3 Output off delay time for output 3

13.3
13.3.1

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)


Introduction
A high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.

13.3.2

Inverter function block (INV)


I001INV INPUT OUT en04000404.vsd

Figure 263:
Table 264:
Signal INPUT

INV function block


Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Description Input

Table 265:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block


Description Output

13.3.3

OR function block (OR)

502

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
O001OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

en04000405.vsd

Figure 264:
Table 266:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6

OR function block
Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Description Input 1 to OR gate Input 2 to OR gate Input 3 to OR gate Input 4 to OR gate Input 5 to OR gate Input 6 to OR gate

Table 267:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block


Description Output from OR gate Inverted output from OR gate

13.3.4

AND function block (AND)


The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs and one of the outputs are inverted.
A001AND INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4N OUT NOUT

en04000406.vsd

Figure 265:

AND function block

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

503

Section 13 Logic

Table 268:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N

Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block


Description Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 inverted

Table 269:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block


Description Output Output inverted

13.3.5

Timer function block (Timer)


The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).
T M01Timer INPUT T ON OFF en04000378.vsd

Figure 266:
Table 270:
Signal INPUT

TM function block
Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Description Input to timer

Table 271:
Signal ON OFF

Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block


Description Output from timer , pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 272:
Parameter T

General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function


Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay of function

504

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic 13.3.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)


The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
TP01Pulse INPUT OUT en04000407.vsd

Figure 267:
Table 273:
Signal INPUT

PULSE function block


Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Description Input to pulse timer

Table 274:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block


Description Output from pulse timer

Table 275:
Parameter T

General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function


Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit s Description Time delay of function

13.3.7

Exclusive OR function block (XOR)


The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
XO01XOR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUT NOUT en04000409.vsd

Figure 268:
Table 276:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2

XOR function block


Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Description Input 1 to XOR gate Input 2 to XOR gate

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

505

Section 13 Logic

Table 277:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block


Description Output from XOR gate Inverted output from XOR gate

13.3.8

Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)


The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
SM01SRM SET RESET OUT NOUT en04000408.vsd

Figure 269:
Table 278:
Signal SET RESET

SM function block
Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Description Set input Reset input

Table 279:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block


Description Output Output inverted

Table 280:
Parameter Memory

Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function


Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of the memory function

13.3.9

Controllable gate function block (GT)


The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

506

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic

GT 01GT INPUT OUT en04000410.vsd

Figure 270:
Table 281:
Signal INPUT

GT function block
Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Description Input to gate

Table 282:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block


Description Output from gate

Table 283:
Parameter Operation

Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function


Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On

13.3.10

Settable timer function block (TS)


The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off that controls the operation of the timer.
TS01TimerSet INPUT ON OFF en04000411.vsd

Figure 271:
Table 284:
Signal INPUT

TS function block
Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Description Input to timer

Table 285:
Signal ON OFF

Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block


Description Output from timer, pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

507

Section 13 Logic

Table 286:
Parameter Operation t

Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function


Range Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Unit s Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n

13.3.11

Technical data
Table 287:
Logic block LogicAND LogicOR LogicXOR LogicInverter LogicSRMemory LogicGate LogicTimer LogicPulseTimer LogicTimerSet LogicLoopDelay

Configurable logic blocks


Quantity with update rate fast medium 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 normal 160 160 20 80 20 20 20 20 20 20 Range or value (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

13.4
13.4.1

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)


Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.

13.4.2

Principle of operation
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value; INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL

508

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 13 Logic

is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600. For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the Application Manual.

13.4.3

Function block
FIXDFixedSignals OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF en05000445.vsd

Figure 272:

FIXD function block

13.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 288:
Signal OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF

Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block


Description Boolean signal fixed off Boolean signal fixed on Integer signal fixed zero Integer signal fixed one Real signal fixed zero String signal with no characters Channel id for zero sample Group signal fixed off

13.4.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

509

510

Section 14 Monitoring

Section 14 Monitoring
About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

14.1

Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

511

Section 14 Monitoring

Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.1.1

Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level (i.e. IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR, provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency

The measuring functions CP and VP provides physical quantities:

512

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) U: phase-phase voltages (magnitude and angle)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ and VSQ provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings. The IED can be provided with up to 3 SVR-, 10 CP-, 5 VP-, 3 CSQ- and 3 VSQmeasurement functions.

14.1.2
14.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options. The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus (IEC 61850-8) Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

513

Section 14 Monitoring
Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0).). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values within SVR. Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 273. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 273.


Y
High-high limit X_RANGE = 3

X_RANGE= 1 High limit X_RANGE=0

Hysteresis

X_RANGE=0 Low limit X_RANGE=2 Low-low limit X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd

Figure 273:

Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP) to get measurement supervision as binary signals. The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 273. The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring

514

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.
Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported

Y3 Y2 Y4

Value Reported

Y1

Y5

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

en05000500.vsd

Figure 274:

Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 275 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

515

Section 14 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 DY DY DY DY

Value Reported Value Reported DY DY

Y1

t
99000529.vsd

Figure 275:

Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XZeroDb), figure 276, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other. The last value reported, Y1 in figure 276 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

516

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Y A >= pre-set value

A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported

A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value


A4 A3 A5
A6

Value Reported (1st)

Value Reported

A7

Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd

Y1

Figure 276:

Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

14.1.2.2

Service values (MMXU, SVR) Mode of operation

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 1 L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
* * *

Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation

Comment

U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

Used when three phaseto-earth voltages are available Used when three two phase-tophase voltages are available Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured Used when only UL1L2 phase-tophase voltage is available

Arone

S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *

U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2

PosSeq

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*

U =

3 U PosSeq

I = I PosSeq
4 L1L2

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *

U = U L1 L 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

517

Section 14 Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 5 L2L3 Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation Comment

S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *

U = U L2 L3 I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

Used when only UL2L3 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL3L1 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL1 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL2 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL3 phase-toearth voltage is available

L3L1

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *

U = U L 3 L1 I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1
*

U =

3 U L1

I = I L1
8 L2

S = 3 U L2 I L2
*

U =

3 U L2

I = IL2
9 L3

S = 3 U L3 I L3
*

U =

3 U L3

I = I L3
* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 2) the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to 9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 83)

Q = Im( S )

(Equation 84)

S = S =

P +Q
2

(Equation 85)

PF = cosj = P S

(Equation 86)

518

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor. Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 277.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir

en05000652.vsd

Figure 277:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I & power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in RED 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D 519

Section 14 Monitoring

the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
where: X XOld is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle (Equation 87)

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision"). In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class available.

Compensation facility

Directionality

In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 278.

520

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Busbar

Protected Object
en05000373.vsd

Figure 278:

Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar. In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

14.1.2.3

Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)


The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 277 above. Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

521

Section 14 Monitoring
14.1.2.4 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)
The VP function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to 0.5 calibrations, see above. Phase to phase voltages (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.2.5

Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)


The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG, are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output. Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (XRANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

14.1.3

Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
SVR1CVMMXU I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE en05000772.vsd

Figure 279:

SVR function block

522

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

CP01CMMXU I3P IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL en05000699.vsd

Figure 280:
VP01VMMXU U3P

CP function block

UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG en05000701.vsd

Figure 281:
CSQ1CMSQI I3P

VP function block

3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG en05000703.vsd

Figure 282:
VSQ1VMSQI U3P

CS function block

3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG en05000704.vsd

Figure 283:

VS function block

14.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 289:
Signal I3P U3P

Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block


Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

523

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 290:
Signal S S_RANGE P P_RANGE Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE

Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block


Description Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value Apparent Power range Active Power magnitude of deadband value Active Power range Active Power magnitude of deadband value Reactive Power range Power Factor magnitude of deadband value Power Factor range Current is lagging voltage Current is leading voltage Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value Calcuate voltage range Calculated current magnitude of deadband value Calculated current range System frequency magnitude of deadband value System frequency range

Table 291:
Signal I3P

Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block


Description Group connection abstract block 1

Table 292:
Signal IL1 IL1RANG IL2 IL2RANG IL3 IL3RANG

Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block


Description IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL1 Amplitude range IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL2 Amplitude range IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL3 Amplitude range

Table 293:
Signal U3P

Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block


Description Group connection abstract block 2

524

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 294:
Signal UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG

Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block


Description UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL12 Amplitude range UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL23 Amplitude range UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL31 Amplitude range

Table 295:
Signal I3P

Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block


Description Group connection abstract block 3

Table 296:
Signal 3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG

Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block


Description 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3I0 Amplitude range I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I1 Amplitude range I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I2 Amplitude range

Table 297:
Signal U3P

Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block


Description Group connection abstract block 4

Table 298:
Signal 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG

Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block


Description 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3U0 Amplitude range U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U1 Amplitude range U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U2 Amplitude range

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

525

Section 14 Monitoring 14.1.5 Setting parameters


The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 299:
Parameter SDbRepInt

General settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% VA VA VA VA VA VA Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

SZeroDb SHiHiLim SHiLim SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

0 900000000.000 800000000.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1000000000.000 Cyclic

SLimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

PDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% W

PZeroDb PHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 900000000.000

PHiLim

0.001

800000000.000

PLowLim

0.001

-800000000.000

PLowLowLim

0.001

-900000000.000

PMin

0.001

-1000000000.000

Table continued on next page

526

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter PMax Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 1000000000.000 Unit W Description Maximum value

PRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

PLimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

QDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% VAr

QZeroDb QHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Off On -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 1 - 99999 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900000000.000

QHiLim

0.001

800000000.000

VAr

QLowLim

0.001

-800000000.000

VAr

QLowLowLim

0.001

-900000000.000

VAr

QMin

0.001

-1000000000.000

VAr

Operation QMax

0.001

On 1000000000.000

VAr

Operation Off / On Maximum value

IBase QRepTyp

1 -

3000 Cyclic

A -

Base setting for current level in A Reporting type

UBase QLimHyst

0.05 0.001

400.00 5.000

kV %

Base setting for voltage level in kV Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Selection of measured current and voltage

Mode

L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3

L1, L2, L3

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

527

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter PowAmpFact Range 0.000 - 6.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I &U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in % of Ubase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of Ibase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

PowAngComp

-180.0 - 180.0

0.1

0.0

Deg

0.00 - 1.00

0.01

0.00

PFDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% % % -

PFZeroDb UGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp

0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

0 5 3.000 5 2.000 -2.000 -3.000 -1.000 1.000 Cyclic

PFLimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

UDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

UZeroDb UHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

UHiLim

0.001

450000.000

ULowLim

0.001

380000.000

Table continued on next page

528

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter ULowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 350000.000 Unit V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UMin

0.001

0.000

UMax

0.001

400000.000

Maximum value

URepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

ULimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

IDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

IZeroDb IHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

IHiLim

0.001

800.000

ILowLim

0.001

-800.000

ILowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

IMin

0.001

0.000

IMax

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

ILimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value)

FrDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% Hz

FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 65.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

529

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter FrHiLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 63.000 Unit Hz Description High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

FrLowLim

0.001

47.000

Hz

FrLowLowLim

0.001

45.000

Hz

FrMin

0.001

0.000

Hz

FrMax

0.001

70.000

Hz

Maximum value

FrRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

FrLimHyst

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

530

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 300:
Parameter IL1DbRepInt

General settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% A Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) Base setting for current level in A Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Low Low limit (physical value) Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Minimum value

Operation IL1ZeroDb IL1HiHiLim

Off On 0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 1 - 99999 -10.000 - 10.000

1 0.001

On 0 900.000

IBase IAmpComp5

1 0.001

3000 0.000

A %

IL1HiLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001

800.000

IAmpComp30

0.001

0.000

IL1LowLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001

-800.000

IAmpComp100

0.001

0.000

IL1LowLowLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

0.001

-900.000

IAngComp5 IL1Min

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

Deg A

IAngComp30 IL1Max

0.001 0.001

0.000 1000.000

Deg A

Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Maximum value

IAngComp100 IL1RepTyp

0.001 -

0.000 Cyclic

Deg -

Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir Reporting type

IL1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

IL1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

531

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IL1AngRepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type

IL2DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

IL2ZeroDb IL2HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

IL2HiLim

0.001

800.000

IL2LowLim

0.001

-800.000

IL2LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

IL2Min

0.001

0.000

IL2Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IL2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

IL2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

IL2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

IL2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

IL3DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

IL3HiLim

0.001

800.000

IL3LowLim

0.001

-800.000

Table continued on next page

532

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IL3LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -900.000 Unit A Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

IL3Min

0.001

0.000

IL3Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IL3RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

IL3LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

IL3AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

IL3AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table 301:
Parameter UL12DbRepInt

General settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) Base setting for voltage level in kV Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Low limit (physical value)

Operation UL12ZeroDb UL12HiHiLim

Off On 0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.05 - 2000.00 -10.000 - 10.000

1 0.001

On 0 460000.000

UBase UAmpComp5

0.05 0.001

400.00 0.000

kV %

UL12HiLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001

450000.000

UAmpComp30

0.001

0.000

UL12LowLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000

0.001

380000.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

533

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UAmpComp100 Range -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit % Description Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UL12LowLowLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

0.001

350000.000

UL12Min

0.001

0.000

UL12Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL12RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL12LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL12AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

UL12AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

UL23DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

UL23HiLim

0.001

450000.000

UL23LowLim

0.001

380000.000

UL23LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

UL23Min

0.001

0.000

UL23Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL23RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL23LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

Table continued on next page

534

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UL23AnDbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL23AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

UL31DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

UL31HiLim

0.001

450000.000

UL31LowLim

0.001

380000.000

UL31LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

UL31Min

0.001

0.000

UL31Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL31RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL31LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL31AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

UL31AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

535

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 302:
Parameter 3I0DbRepInt

General settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% A Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

3I0HiLim

0.001

800.000

3I0LowLim

0.001

-800.000

3I0LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

3I0Min

0.001

0.000

3I0Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

3I0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3I0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Operation Mode On / Off Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

Operation 3I0AngDbRepInt

Off On 1 - 300

Off 10

s,%, %s -

3I0AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

I1DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

I1HiLim

0.001

800.000

I1LowLim

0.001

-800.000

Table continued on next page

536

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter I1LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -900.000 Unit A Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I1Min

0.001

0.000

I1Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

I1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

I1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

I2DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

1 0.001

0 900.000

I2HiLim

0.001

800.000

I2LowLim

0.001

-800.000

I2LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

I2Min

0.001

0.000

I2Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

537

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter I2LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

I2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table 303:
Parameter 3U0DbRepInt

General settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

3U0HiLim

0.001

450000.000

3U0LowLim

0.001

380000.000

3U0LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

3U0Min

0.001

0.000

3U0Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

3U0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3U0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Operation Mode On / Off Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

Operation 3U0AngDbRepInt

Off On 1 - 300

Off 10

s,%, %s -

3U0AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table continued on next page

538

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter U1DbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

U1HiLim

0.001

450000.000

U1LowLim

0.001

380000.000

U1LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

U1Min

0.001

0.000

U1Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

U1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

U1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

U1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

U1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

U2DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)

U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

U2HiLim

0.001

450000.000

U2LowLim

0.001

380000.000

U2LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

539

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter U2Min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit V Description Minimum value

U2Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

U2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

U2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

U2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

U2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

14.1.6

Technical data
Table 304:
Function Frequency Voltage Connected current Active power, P Reactive power, Q Apparent power, S Power factor, cos ()

Measurements (MMXU)
Range or value (0.95-1.05) fr (0.1-1.5) Ur (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% of Ur at U Ur 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ir at I Ir 0.5% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 0.02

14.2

Event counter (GGIO)


Function block name: ECNxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CNTGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

540

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring 14.2.1 Introduction


The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter has been activated. It is also provided with a common blocking function for all six counters, to be used for example at testing. Every counter can separately be set on or off by a parameter setting.

14.2.2

Principle of operation
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place. To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing. All inputs are configured via PCM 600.

14.2.2.1

Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, for example PCM 600 or MicroSkada.

14.2.2.2

Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

541

Section 14 Monitoring

The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.

14.2.3

Function block
CNT1CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET en05000345.vsd

Figure 284:

CNT function block

14.2.4

Input signals
Table 305:
Signal BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET

Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block


Description Block of function Input for counter1 Input for counter2 Input for counter3 Input for counter4 Input for counter5 Input for counter6 Reset of function

14.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

14.2.6

Technical data
Table 306:
Function Counter value Max. count up speed

Event counter (GGIO)


Range or value 0-10000 10 pulses/s Accuracy -

542

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

14.3
14.3.1

Event function (EV)


Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.

14.3.2

Principle of operation
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled. Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events. The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

543

Section 14 Monitoring

NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events. This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication respectively. For each communication type these settings are available: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel. To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.

544

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring 14.3.3 Function block


EV01Event BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000697.vsd

14.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 307:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block


Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

545

Section 14 Monitoring
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 Description Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 User defined string for input 1 User defined string for input 2 User defined string for input 3 User defined string for input 4 User defined string for input 5 User defined string for input 6 User defined string for input 7 User defined string for input 8 User defined string for input 9 User defined string for input 10 User defined string for input 11 User defined string for input 12 User defined string for input 13 User defined string for input 14 User defined string for input 15 User defined string for input 16

14.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 308:
Parameter SPAChannelMask

General settings for the Event (EV01-) function


Range Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default Off Unit Description SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask

Off

LON channel mask

EventMask1

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 1

EventMask2

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 2

Table continued on next page

546

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter EventMask3 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 3

EventMask4

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 4

EventMask5

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 5

EventMask6

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 6

EventMask7

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 7

EventMask8

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 8

EventMask9

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 9

EventMask10

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 10

EventMask11

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 11

EventMask12

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 12

EventMask13

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 13

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

547

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter EventMask14 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 14

EventMask15

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 15

EventMask16

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 16

MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5 MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s

Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5 Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16

14.4
548

Fault locator (RFLO)


Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Function block name: FL--ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: LMBRFLO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.4.1

Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line. The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double circuit lines. The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy. Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important) where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.

14.4.2

Principle of operation
The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM 600. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

549

Section 14 Monitoring

R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1A+jX1A Z0m=Z0m+jX0m R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1B+jX1B

DRP FL

en05000045.vsd

Figure 285:

Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function.

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved. The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600. Additional information is specified in symbols before the distance-to-fault figure:
* E > A non-compensated model was used for calculation Error, the fault was found outside the measuring range The fault is located beyond the line, in forward direction

Two signs can be combined, for example, *>

14.4.2.1

Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance. The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

550

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
14.4.2.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault
Figure 286 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.
L F

ZA

A IA

pZL IF

IB

(1-p).ZL

ZB

UA

RF

xx01000171.vsd

Figure 286:

Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.

From figure 286 it is evident that:


U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
(Equation 88)

Where: IA IF
p

is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault, is the fault current and is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:


IF A IF = ------DA

(Equation 89)

Where: IFA DA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

551

Section 14 Monitoring

For a single line, the value is equal to:


( 1 p ) Z L + ZB DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB

(Equation 90)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA - RF U A = I A p Z L + ------DA

(Equation 91)

Table 309:
Fault type: L1-N

Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults


UA UL1A IA IL1A + KN x INA IFA

3 -- D ( I L1A I 0A ) 2
3 -- D ( I L2A I 0A ) 2

L2-N

UL2A

IL2A + KN x INA

L3-N

UL3A

IL3A + KN x INA

3 -- D ( I L3A I0A ) 2
D IL 1 L 2 A

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2N L2-L3, L2-L3-N

UL1A-UL2A UL2A-UL3A

IL1A - IL2A IL2A - IL3A

D IL2L3A

L3-L1, L3-L1-N

UL3A-UL1A

IL3A - IL1A

D IL3L1A

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L Z 1L K N = ----------------------3 Z1L

(Equation 98)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault. In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm. For double lines, the fault equation is:

552

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

I FA - RF + I 0P Z 0M U A = I A p Z 1L + ------DA

(Equation 99)

Where: I0P Z0M DA is a zero sequence current of the parallel line, is a mutual zero sequence impedance and is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:


Z0L Z 1L Z 0M I 0P - + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A

(Equation 101)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases. Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 91 or 100 is a function of p, the general equation 100 can be written in the form:
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
2

(Equation 102)

Where:
UA ZB - + --------------------------+1 K 1 = --------------I A ZL Z L + ZA DD

(Equation 103)

UA ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K2 = ------------- IA Z L Z L + Z A DD

(Equation 104)

IF A ZA + ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K 3 = -------------- I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD

(Equation 105)

and: RED 670 ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 101. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters. 553

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 14 Monitoring

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 102 applies to both single and parallel lines. Equation 102 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
2

(Equation 106)

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0

(Equation 107)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 107, and then inserted to equation 106. According to equation 106, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation. Equation 106 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected. If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.

14.4.2.3

The non-compensated impedance model


In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
(Equation 108)

Where: IA is according to table 309.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function and the display indicates whether the non-compensated model was used when calculating the distance to the fault.

14.4.2.4

IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.

554

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring 14.4.3 Function block


FLO1LMBRFLO PHSELL1 PHSELL2 PHSELL3 CALCDIST FLTDISTX CALCMADE BCD_80 BCD_40 BCD_20 BCD_10 BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1 en05000679.vsd

Figure 287:

FLO function block

14.4.4

Input and output signals


Table 310:
Signal PHSELL1 PHSELL2 PHSELL3 CALCDIST

Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block


Description Phase selecton L1 Phase selecton L2 Phase selecton L3 Do calculate fault distance (release)

Table 311:
Signal FLTDISTX CALCMADE

Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block


Description Reactive distance to fault Fault calculation made

14.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 312:
Parameter DrepChNoIL1

General settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function


Range 1 - 30 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Recorder input number recording phase current, IL1 Recorder input number recording phase current, IL2 Recorder input number recording phase current, IL3

DrepChNoIL2

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoIL3

1 - 30

Ch

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

555

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter DrepChNoIN Range 0 - 30 Step 1 Default 4 Unit Ch Description Recorder input number recording residual current, IN Recorder input number recording 3I0 on parallel line Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL1 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL2 Recorder input number recording phase voltage, UL3

DrepChNoIP

0 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoUL1

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoUL2

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoUL3

1 - 30

Ch

Table 313:
Parameter R1A X1A R1B X1B R1L X1L R0L X0L R0M X0M LineLength

Parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function


Range 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.0 - 10000.0 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 Default 2.000 12.000 2.000 12.000 2.000 12.500 8.750 50.000 0.000 0.000 40.0 Unit ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p km Description Source resistance A (near end) Source reactance A (near end) Source resistance B (far end) Source reactance B (far end) Positive sequence line resistance Positive sequence line reactance Zero sequence line resistance Zero sequence line reactance Zero sequence mutual resistance Zero sequence mutual reactance Length of line

14.4.6

Technical data

556

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 314:
Function

Fault locator (RFLO)


Value or range (0.001-1500.000) /phase Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0% degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir -

Reactive and resistive reach

Phase selection Maximum number of fault locations

According to input signals 100

14.5

Measured value expander block


Function block name: XP ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.5.1

Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.

14.5.2

Principle of operation
The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 315.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

557

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 315:

Input integer value converted to binary output signals


below low-low between low limit low and low limit High High High High High between low and high limit between high- above highhigh and high high limit limit

Measured supervised value is: Output: LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH

14.5.3

Function block
RANGE XP01RANGE_XP HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LO W LOWLOW en05000346.vsd

Figure 288:

XP function block

14.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 316:
Signal RANGE

Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block


Description Measured value range

Table 317:
Signal HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW

Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block


Description Measured value is above high-high limit Measured value is between high and high-high limit Measured value is between high and low limit Measured value is between low and low-low limit Measured value is below low-low limit

14.6

Disturbance report (RDRE)

558

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ABRDRE

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.6.1

Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analogue input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum 40 analogue and 96 binary signals. The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions: Event List (EL) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip Value recorder (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault Locator (FL)

The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording times and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of prefault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

14.6.2

Principle of operation
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the system. The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

559

Section 14 Monitoring

General disturbance information Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Event list (EL) Trip values (phase values) (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault locator (FL)

Figure 289Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4Disturbance Report DRP- A4RADR Analog signals Trip Value Rec Fault Locator RDRE FL01 FL

DRB1-- 6-

Disturbance Recorder

Binary signals

B6RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications

en05000124.vsd

Figure 289:

Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 1-65536.

560

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Disturbance report

Record no. N

Record no. N+1

Record no. N+100

General dist. information

Indications

Trip values

Event recordings

Disturbance recording

Fault locator

Event list

en05000125.vsd

Figure 290:

Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure 291 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system its possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).

Number of recordings 100 80 60


6,3 s 3,4 s 40 analog 96 binary 3,4 s 20 analog 96 binary

6,3 s 50 Hz

40

6,3 s 60 Hz

Total recording time 250 300 350 400 s


en05000488.vsd

Figure 291:

Number of recordings.

Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

561

Section 14 Monitoring

complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports). Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Indications (IND)

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Trip value recorder (TVR)

Disturbance recorder (DR)

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "Fault locator (RFLO)" for more detailed information)

Fault locator (FL)

Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times

The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =

PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

562

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Trig point TimeLimit PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

3
en05000487.vsd

Figure 292:
PreFaultRecT, 1 tFault, 2

The recording times definition


Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time. TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

563

Section 14 Monitoring

PRxxSMAI External analog signals TRM, LDCM SUxx GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 ... A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 ... INPUT40
en05000653.vsd

DRA2A2RADR DRA3A3RADR

Internal analog signals T2Dx, T3Dx, REFx, HZDx, L3D, L6D, LT3D, LT6D SVRx, CPxx, VP0x, CSQx, VSQx, MVxx

Figure 293:

Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analogue configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used. The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

564

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when: the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (operation=ON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (setLED=On/Off). The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions. A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600 or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.

Manual trigger

Binary-signal trigger

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1).The binary signal must remain in a steady state for at least 15 ms to be valid. When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

565

Section 14 Monitoring
Analog-signal trigger

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe. The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see table 318.

Post Retrigger

The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line. In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be fetched. The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

14.6.3

Function block
DRP-RDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED en05000406.vsd

Figure 294:

DRP function block

566

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 en05000430.vsd

Figure 295:

DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1DRA3

DRA4A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40 en05000431.vsd

Figure 296:

DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

567

Section 14 Monitoring

DRB1B1RBDR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000432.vsd

Figure 297:

DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1DRB6

14.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 318:
Signal DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED

Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block


Description Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used

Table 319:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5

Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block, example for DRA1DRA3
Description Group signal for input 1 Group signal for input 2 Group signal for input 3 Group signal for input 4 Group signal for input 5

Table continued on next page

568

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Signal INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 Description Group signal for input 6 Group signal for input 7 Group signal for input 8 Group signal for input 9 Group signal for input 10 User define string for analogue input 1 User define string for analogue input 2 User define string for analogue input 3 User define string for analogue input 4 User define string for analogue input 5 User define string for analogue input 6 User define string for analogue input 7 User define string for analogue input 8 User define string for analogue input 9 User define string for analogue input 10

Table 320:
Signal INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40

Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block


Description Analogue channel 31 Analogue channel 32 Analogue channel 33 Analogue channel 34 Analogue channel 35 Analogue channel 36 Analogue channel 37 Analogue channel 38 Analogue channel 39 Analogue channel 40 User define string for analogue input 31 User define string for analogue input 32 User define string for analogue input 33 User define string for analogue input 34 User define string for analogue input 35 User define string for analogue input 36 User define string for analogue input 37 User define string for analogue input 38 User define string for analogue input 39 User define string for analogue input 40

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

569

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 321:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16

Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block, example for DRB1DRB6
Description Binary channel 1 Binary channel 2 Binary channel 3 Binary channel 4 Binary channel 5 Binary channel 6 Binary channel 7 Binary channel 8 Binary channel 9 Binary channel 10 Binary channel 11 Binary channel 12 Binary channel 13 Binary channel 14 Binary channel 15 Binary channel 16 User define string for binary input 1 User define string for binary input 2 User define string for binary input 3 User define string for binary input 4 User define string for binary input 5 User define string for binary input 6 User define string for binary input 7 User define string for binary input 8 User define string for binary input 9 User define string for binary input 10 User define string for binary input 11 User define string for binary input 12 User define string for binary input 13 User define string for binary input 14 User define string for binary input 15 User define string for binary input 16

14.6.5

Setting parameters

570

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

Table 322:
Parameter OpModeTest Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig

General settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function


Range Off On Off On 0.05 - 0.30 0.1 - 5.0 0.5 - 6.0 Off On 1 - 30 Step 0.01 0.1 0.1 Default Off Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off Unit s s s Description Operation mode during test mode Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel

ZeroAngleRef

Ch

Table 323:
Parameter Operation01 NomValue01

General settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function


Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Unit Description Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 1 Use under level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 2 Use under level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigOp01

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe01

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp01

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe01

0 - 5000

200

Operation02 NomValue02

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp02

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

571

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe02 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 4 Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off

OverTrigOp02

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe02

0 - 5000

200

Operation03 NomValue03

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp03

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe03

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp03

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe03

0 - 5000

200

Operation04 NomValue04

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp04

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe04

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp04

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe04

0 - 5000

200

Operation05

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

572

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter NomValue05 Range 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Unit Description Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7 Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigOp05

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe05

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp05

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe05

0 - 5000

200

Operation06 NomValue06

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp06

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe06

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp06

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe06

0 - 5000

200

Operation07 NomValue07

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp07

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe07

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp07

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

573

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe07 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off)

Operation08 NomValue08

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp08

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe08

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp08

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe08

0 - 5000

200

Operation09 NomValue09

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp09

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe09

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp09

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe09

0 - 5000

200

Operation10 NomValue10

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp10

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

574

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe10 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal

OverTrigOp10

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe10

0 - 5000

200

Table 324:
Parameter Operation31 NomValue31

General settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function


Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 31 Use under level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 32 Use under level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigOp31

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe31

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp31

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe31

0 - 5000

200

Operation32 NomValue32

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp32

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe32

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp32

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

575

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe32 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33 Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off)

Operation33 NomValue33

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp33

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe33

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp33

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe33

0 - 5000

200

Operation34 NomValue34

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp34

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe34

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp34

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe34

0 - 5000

200

Operation35 NomValue35

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp35

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

576

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe35 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Operation On/off

OverTrigOp35

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe35

0 - 5000

200

Operation36 NomValue36

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp36

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe36

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp36

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe36

0 - 5000

200

Operation37 NomValue37

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp37

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe37

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp37

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe37

0 - 5000

200

Operation38

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

577

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter NomValue38 Range 0.0 - 999999.9 Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Unit Description Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigOp38

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe38

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp38

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe38

0 - 5000

200

Operation39 NomValue39

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp39

Off On

Off

UnderTrigLe39

0 - 200

50

OverTrigOp39

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe39

0 - 5000

200

Operation40 NomValue40

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

Off 0.0

UnderTrigOp40

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

578

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe40 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal

OverTrigOp40

Off On

Off

OverTrigLe40

0 - 5000

200

Setting parameters FUNCn and INFONOn (n=1-16) for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function are only available in the LHMI.

Table 325:
Parameter Operation01 TrigLevel01

General settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function


Range Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3

IndicationMa01

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED01

Off

Operation02 TrigLevel02

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa02

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED02

Off

Operation03 TrigLevel03

Off Trig on 1

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

579

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IndicationMa03 Range Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Hide Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7

SetLED03

Off

Operation04 TrigLevel04

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa04

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED04

Off

Operation05 TrigLevel05

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa05

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED05

Off

Operation06 TrigLevel06

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa06

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED06

Off

Operation07 TrigLevel07

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa07

Hide Show

Hide

Table continued on next page

580

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter SetLED07 Range Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Off Unit Description Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/Off

Operation08 TrigLevel08

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa08

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED08

Off

Operation09 TrigLevel09

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa09

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED09

Off

Operation10 TrigLevel10

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa10

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED10

Off

Operation11 TrigLevel11

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa11

Hide Show Off On Off On

Hide

SetLED11

Off

Operation12

Off

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

581

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter TrigLevel12 Range Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Step Default Trig on 1 Unit Description Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16

IndicationMa12

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED12

Off

Operation13 TrigLevel13

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa13

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED13

Off

Operation14 TrigLevel14

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa14

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED14

Off

Operation15 TrigLevel15

Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa15

Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1

Hide

SetLED15

Off

Operation16 TrigLevel16

Off Trig on 1

Table continued on next page

582

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter IndicationMa16 Range Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 Step Default Hide Unit Description Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)

SetLED16

Off

FUNCT1

FunT

FUNCT2

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT3

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT4

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT5

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT6

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT7

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT8

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT9

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT10

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT11

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT12

0 - 255

FunT

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

583

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter FUNCT13 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit FunT Description Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FUNCT14

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT15

0 - 255

FunT

FUNCT16

0 - 255

FunT

INFONO1

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO2

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO3

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO4

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO5

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO6

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO7

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO8

0 - 255

InfNo

Table continued on next page

584

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring
Parameter INFONO9 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit InfNo Description Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

INFONO10

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO11

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO12

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO13

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO14

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO15

0 - 255

InfNo

INFONO16

0 - 255

InfNo

14.6.6

Technical data
Table 326:
Function Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Table continued on next page

Disturbance report (RDRE)


Range or value (0.050.30) s (0.15.0) s (0.56.0) s 100 1 ms Accuracy See table26

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

585

Section 14 Monitoring
Function Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) Sampling rate Recording bandwidth Range or value 30 + 10 (external + internally derived) 96 30 Accuracy -

96 150 1000, first in - first out 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz (5-300) Hz

14.7
14.7.1

Event list (RDRE)


Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer. The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event list.

14.7.2

Principle of operation
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives. The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the LHMI.

586

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER). The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

14.7.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.7.4

Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance Report function.

14.7.5

Technical data
Table 327:
Function Buffer capacity Resolution Accuracy Maximum number of events in the list

Event list (RDRE)


Value 1000 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

14.8
14.8.1

Indications (RDRE)
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way. There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

587

Section 14 Monitoring

The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information.

14.8.2

Principle of operation
The LED indications display this information: Green LED:
Steady light Flashing light Dark In Service Internal fail No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Flashing light A disturbance report is triggered The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list: The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the: the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block the DRP parameter Operation must be set On the DRP must be trigged (binary or analogue) the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring the binary inputs. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in

588

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).

14.8.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.8.4

Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

14.8.5

Technical data
Table 328:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance Maximum number of recorded disturbances

Indications
Value 96 100

14.9
14.9.1

Event recorder (RDRE)


Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis). The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

589

Section 14 Monitoring 14.9.2 Principle of operation


When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording. In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER). The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.

14.9.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.9.4

Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

14.9.5

Technical data
Table 329:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report Maximum number of disturbance reports Resolution Accuracy

Event recorder (RDRE)


Value 150 100 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

590

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

14.10
14.10.1

Trip value recorder (RDRE)


Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation. The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analogue input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analogue input signal. The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

14.10.2

Principle of operation
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL). When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number. When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals. If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as prefault and fault values. The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

591

Section 14 Monitoring

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.

14.10.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

14.10.4

Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not DRA4).

14.10.5

Technical data
Table 330:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports

Trip value recorder (RDRE)


Value 30 100

14.11
14.11.1

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)


Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g. corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis). The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analogue input and binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the event recorder function. The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of recordings.

592

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

14.11.2

Principle of operation
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)". DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time. Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the postfault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig). A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

14.11.2.1

Memory and storage


When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs. This post-recording processing comprises: Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600) Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

593

Section 14 Monitoring

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way. General: Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group

Analog: Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction

Binary: Signal names Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc. The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.

14.11.2.2

IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals. The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).

594

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 14 Monitoring

To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 331.
Table 331:
Signal IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UN

Configuration of analog channels


Disturbance recorder DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8

The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.

14.11.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and DRBx- block.

14.11.4

Input and output signals


For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".

14.11.5

Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 322 - table 325.

14.11.6

Technical data
Table 332:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)


Value 40 96 100 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

595

596

Section 15 Metering

Section 15 Metering
About this chapter
This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

15.1

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)


Function block name: PCxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PCGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

15.1.1

Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

15.1.2

Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

597

Section 15 Metering

The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED. The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function. The pulse counter function requires an binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function. Figure 298 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/O-module Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s Reset counter PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART READ_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME SCAL_VAL EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

IEC EVENT

SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s...60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events 4.Scale = 1-90000

Database Pulse counter value: 0...2147483647


en05000744.vsd

Figure 298:

Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected 598 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 15 Metering

to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters. The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter. Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block. The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report. The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.

15.1.3

Function block
PC01PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL NAME SCAL_VAL en05000709.vsd

Figure 299:

PC function block

15.1.4

Input and output signals

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

599

Section 15 Metering

Table 333:
Signal BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT

Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block


Description Block pulse counter function Initiates an additional pulse counter reading Connect binary input channel for metering Resets pulse counter value

Table 334:
Signal INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL NAME SCAL_VAL

Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block


Description The pulse counter value is invalid The reported value not comprise a complete integration cycle The pulse counter function is blocked A new pulse counter value is generated User defined string for pulse counter Scaled value with time and status information

15.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 335:
Parameter Operation EventMask

General settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function


Range Off On NoEvents ReportEvents Step Default Off NoEvents Unit Description Operation Off/On Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria

CountCriteria

Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange 1.000 - 90000.000

RisingEdge

Scale

0.001

1.000

Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output

Quantity

Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600

Count

tReporting

60

Cycle time for reporting of counter value

600

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 15 Metering 15.1.6 Technical data


Table 336:
Function Input frequency Cycle time for report of counter value

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)


Setting range See Binary Input Module (BIM) (03600) s Accuracy -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

601

602

Section 16 Station communication

Section 16 Station communication


About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

16.1

Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

16.2
16.2.1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol


Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided. When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

603

Section 16 Station communication 16.2.2


16.2.2.1

Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)


Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

16.2.2.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user output) to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

16.2.2.3

Function block
SP01SPGGIO IN en05000409.vsd

Figure 300:

SP function block

MP01SP16GGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 en06000632.vsd

Figure 301:

MP function block

16.2.2.4

Input and output signals


Table 337:
Signal IN

Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block


Description Input status

604

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 338:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16

Input signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block


Description Block of function Input 1 status Input 2 status Input 3 status Input 4 status Input 5 status Input 6 status Input 7 status Input 8 status Input 9 status Input 10 status Input 11 status Input 12 status Input 13 status Input 14 status Input 15 status Input 16 status

16.2.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

16.2.3
16.2.3.1

Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)


Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

16.2.3.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC61850-8-1 (through two not-visible-to-CAP user outputs) the value and the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

605

Section 16 Station communication


16.2.3.3 Function block
MV01MVGGIO IN VALUE RANGE en05000408.vsd

Figure 302:

MV function block

16.2.3.4

Input and output signals


Table 339:
Signal IN

Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block


Description Analogue input value

Table 340:
Signal VALUE RANGE

Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block


Description Magnitude of deadband value Range

16.2.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 341:
Parameter MV db

General settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function


Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Description Deadband value in % of range (in %s if integral is used) Values less than this are forced to zero in 0,001% of range High High limit

MV zeroDb

0 - 100000

500

MV hhLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

0.001

90.000

MV hLim

0.001

80.000

High limit

MV lLim

0.001

-80.000

Low limit

MV llLim

0.001

-90.000

Low Low limit

Table continued on next page

606

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Parameter MV min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -100.000 Unit Description Minimum value

MV max

0.001

100.000

Maximum value

MV dbType

Dead band

Reporting type (0=cyclic, 1=db, 2=integral db) Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

MV limHys

0.001

5.000

16.2.4

Technical data
Table 342:
Function Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol


Value IEC 61850-8-1 100BASE-FX

16.3
16.3.1

LON communication protocol


Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals. The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO). In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in general.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

607

Section 16 Station communication 16.3.2 Principle of operation


The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet). The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master. The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data. The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.

LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators manual. Activate LONCommunication Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings -> General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON, where ADE should be set to ON. Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT IED 670 package version 1p2 r03.

608

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


LON net address To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED. Vertical communication Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages. Events and indications Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal. Binary events Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 343 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294. For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be used for other type of events at the same event block. As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals. 16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs. The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 343
Table 343:
Function block EV01 EV02 EV03 EV04 EV05 EV06 EV07

LON adresses for Event functions


First LON address in function block 1024 1040 1056 1072 1088 1104 1120

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

609

Section 16 Station communication


Function block EV08 EV09 EV10 EV11 EV12 EV13 EV14 EV15 EV16 EV17 EV18 EV19 EV20 First LON address in function block 1136 1152 1168 1184 1200 1216 1232 1248 1264 1280 1296 1312 1328

Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block. Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block. Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block. Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block.

610

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.

Figure 303:

Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Command handling Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service. Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

611

Section 16 Station communication

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 344

Horizontal communication

Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values. The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON. This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs. Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking between two 670IEDs.
LON BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MT07

CM09

CM09

en05000718.vsd

Figure 304:

Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three terminals.

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New

612

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

en05000719.vsd

Figure 305:

The network variables window in LNT.

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-anddrop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

613

Section 16 Station communication

en05000720.vsd

Figure 306:

The download configuration window in LNT.

Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 344:
Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD Table continued on next page

SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Function block SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SPA address 1 I 5115 1 I 5139 1 I 5161 1 I 5186 1 I 5210 1 I 5234 1 I 5258 1 I 5283 1 I 5307 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command

614

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SPA address 1 I 5331 1 I 5355 1 I 5379 1 I 5403 1 I 5427 1 I 5451 1 I 5475 1 I 5499 1 I 5523 1 I 5545 1 I 5571 1 I 5594 1 I 5619 1 I 5643 1 I 5667 1 I 5691 1 I 5715 1 I 5739 1 I 5763 1 I 5787 1 I 5811 1 I 5835 1 I 5859 1 I 5107 1 I 5131 1 I 5153 1 I 5178 1 I 5202 1 I 5226 1 I 5250 1 I 5275 1 I 5299 1 I 5323 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

615

Section 16 Station communication


Name CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SPA address 1 I 5347 1 I 5371 1 I 5395 1 I 5419 1 I 5443 1 I 5467 1 I 5491 1 I 5515 1 I 5537 1 I 5563 1 I 5586 1 I 5611 1 I 5635 1 I 5659 1 I 5683 1 I 5707 1 I 5731 1 I 5755 1 I 5779 1 I 5803 1 I 5827 1 I 5851 Description SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command

616

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, SELOpen+ILO=10, SELClose+ILO=11, SELOpen+SCO=20, SELClose+SCO=21, SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30, SELClose+ILO+SCO=31 SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5105 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22

1 I 5129 1 I 5151 1 I 5176 1 I 5200 1 I 5224 1 I 5248 1 I 5273 1 I 5297 1 I 5321 1 I 5345 1 I 5369 1 I 5393 1 I 5417 1 I 5441 1 I 5465 1 I 5489 1 I 5513 1 I 5535 1 I 5561 1 I 5584 1 I 5609

SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

617

Section 16 Station communication


Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, ExcOpen+ILO=10, ExcClose+ILO=11, ExcOpen+SCO=20, ExcClose+SCO=21, ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30, ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31 ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5633 1 I 5657 1 I 5681 1 I 5705 1 I 5729 1 I 5753 1 I 5777 1 I 5801 1 I 5825 1 I 5849 1 I 5106 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12

1 I 5130 1 I 5152 1 I 5177 1 I 5201 1 I 5225 1 I 5249 1 I 5274 1 I 5298 1 I 5322 1 I 5346 1 I 5370

SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command

618

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Sub Value Function block SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SXCBR01 SPA address 1 I 5394 1 I 5418 1 I 5442 1 I 5466 1 I 5490 1 I 5514 1 I 5536 1 I 5562 1 I 5585 1 I 5610 1 I 5634 1 I 5658 1 I 5682 1 I 5706 1 I 5730 1 I 5754 1 I 5778 1 I 5802 1 I 5826 1 I 5850 2 I 7854 Description SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameter for position to be substituted Note: Send the value before Enable SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted

Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page

SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04

2 I 7866 2 I 7884 2 I 7904

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

619

Section 16 Station communication


Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SPA address 2 I 7923 2 I 7942 2 I 7961 2 I 7980 3I7 3 I 26 3 I 45 3 I 56 3 I 74 3 I 94 3 I 120 3 I 133 3 I 158 3 I 179 3 I 196 3 I 216 3 I 235 3 I 254 3 I 272 3 I 292 3 I 310 3 I 330 3 I 348 3 I 359 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted

620

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Enable Function block SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SPA address 3 I 378 3 I 397 3 I 416 3 I 435 3 I 454 3 I 473 3 I 492 3 I 511 3 I 530 3 I 549 3 I 568 3 I 587 3 I 606 3 I 625 3 I 644 3 I 663 3 I 682 3 I 701 2 I 7855 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for substitute enable command Note: Send the Value before Enable SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page

SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06

2 I 7865 2 I 7885 2 I 7903 2 I 7924 2 I 7941

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

621

Section 16 Station communication


Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SPA address 2 I 7962 2 I 7979 3I8 3 I 25 3 I 46 3 I 55 3 I 75 3 I 93 3 I 121 3 I 132 3 I 159 3 I 178 3 I 197 3 I 215 3 I 234 3 I 252 3 I 271 3 I 290 3 I 309 3 I 328 3 I 347 3 I 360 3I 379 3 I 398 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

622

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SPA address 3 I 417 3 I 436 3 I 455 3 I 474 3 I 493 3 I 512 3 I 531 3 I 550 3 I 569 3 I 588 3 I 607 3 I 626 3 I 645 3 I 664 3 I 683 3 I 702 2 I 7853 2 I 7864 2 I 7883 2 I 7905 2 I 7922 2 I 7943 2 I 7960 2 I 7981 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

623

Section 16 Station communication


Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SPA address 3I6 3 I 27 3 I 44 3 I 57 3 I 73 3 I 92 3 I 122 3 I 131 3 I 160 3 I 177 3 I 198 3 I 214 3 I 236 3 I 253 3 I 273 3 I 291 3 I 311 3 I 329 3 I 349 3 I 358 3 I 377 3 I 396 3 I 415 3 I 434 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

624

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Function block SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SPA address 3 I 453 3 I 472 3 I 491 3 I 510 3 I 529 3 I 548 3 I 567 3 I 586 3 I 605 3 I 624 3 I 643 3 I 662 3 I 681 3 I 700 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

16.3.3

Setting parameters
Table 345:
Parameter Operation

General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function


Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation

Table 346:
Parameter Operation TimerClass

General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function


Range Off On Slow Normal Fast Step Default Off Slow Unit Description Operation Timer class

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

625

Section 16 Station communication 16.3.4 Technical data


Table 347:
Function Protocol Communication speed

LON communication protocol


Value LON 1.25 Mbit/s

16.4
16.4.1

SPA communication protocol


Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

16.4.2

Principle of operation
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (e.g. for event information) or only on demand. The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented. The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in table348

626

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 348:
Function block MI03-CH1 MI03-CH2 MI03-CH3 MI03-CH4 MI03-CH5 MI03-CH6 MI04-CH1 MI04-CH2 MI04-CH3 MI04-CH4 MI04-CH5 MI04-CH6 MI05-CH1 MI05-CH2 MI05-CH3 MI05-CH4 MI05-CH5 MI05-CH6 MI06-CH1 MI06-CH2 MI06-CH3 MI06-CH4 MI06-CH5 MI06-CH6 MI07-CH1 MI07-CH2 MI07-CH3 MI07-CH4 MI07-CH5 MI07-CH6 MI08-CH1 MI08-CH2 MI08-CH3 MI08-CH4 MI08-CH5 MI08-CH6 MI09-CH1 MI09-CH2

SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function


SPA address 4-O-6508 4-O-6511 4-O-6512 4-O-6515 4-O-6516 4-O-6519 4-O-6527 4-O-6530 4-O-6531 4-O-6534 4-O-6535 4-O-6538 4-O-6546 4-O-6549 4-O-6550 4-O-6553 4-O-6554 4-O-6557 4-O-6565 4-O-6568 4-O-6569 4-O-6572 4-O-6573 4-O-6576 4-O-6584 4-O-6587 4-O-6588 4-O-6591 4-O-6592 4-O-6595 4-O-6603 4-O-6606 4-O-6607 4-O-6610 4-O-6611 4-O-6614 4-O-6622 4-O-6625

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

627

Section 16 Station communication


Function block MI09-CH3 MI09-CH4 MI09-CH5 MI09-CH6 MI10-CH1 MI10-CH2 MI10-CH3 MI10-CH4 MI10-CH5 MI10-CH6 MI11-CH1 MI11-CH2 MI11-CH3 MI11-CH4 MI11-CH5 MI11-CH6 MI12-CH1 MI12-CH2 MI12-CH3 MI12-CH4 MI12-CH5 MI12-CH6 MI13-CH1 MI13-CH2 MI13-CH3 MI13-CH4 MI13-CH5 MI13-CH6 MI14-CH1 MI14-CH2 MI14-CH3 MI14-CH4 MI14-CH5 MI14-CH6 MI15-CH1 MI15-CH2 MI15-CH3 MI15-CH4 MI15-CH5 Table continued on next page SPA address 4-O-6626 4-O-6629 4-O-6630 4-O-6633 4-O-6641 4-O-6644 4-O-6645 4-O-6648 4-O-6649 4-O-6652 4-O-6660 4-O-6663 4-O-6664 4-O-6667 4-O-6668 4-O-6671 4-O-6679 4-O-6682 4-O-6683 4-O-6686 4-O-6687 4-O-6690 4-O-6698 4-O-6701 4-O-6702 4-O-6705 4-O-6706 4-O-6709 4-O-6717 4-O-6720 4-O-6721 4-O-6724 4-O-6725 4-O-6728 4-O-6736 4-O-6739 4-O-6740 4-O-6743 4-O-6744

628

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Function block MI15-CH6 MI16-CH1 MI16-CH2 MI16-CH3 MI16-CH4 MI16-CH5 MI16-CH6 SPA address 4-O-6747 4-O-6755 4-O-6758 4-O-6759 4-O-6762 4-O-6763 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 349
Table 349:
Function block PC01-CNT_VAL PC02-CNT_VAL PC03-CNT_VAL PC04-CNT_VAL PC05-CNT_VAL PC06-CNT_VAL PC07-CNT_VAL PC08-CNT_VAL PC09-CNT_VAL PC10-CNT_VAL PC11-CNT_VAL PC12-CNT_VAL PC13-CNT_VAL PC14-CNT_VAL PC15-CNT_VAL PC16-CNT_VAL

SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function


SPA address 3-O-5834 3-O-5840 3-O-5846 3-O-5852 3-O-5858 3-O-5864 3-O-5870 3-O-5876 3-O-5882 3-O-5888 3-O-5894 3-O-5900 3-O-5906 3-O-5912 3-O-5918 3-O-5924

I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Storage of settings in FLASH Settings that do not belong to a setting group are usually written to FLASH on command. One example is for the limits of the mA-input modules (MIxx), where 0 value must be written to the 10V43 address. Addresses for other settings that must be stored on

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

629

Section 16 Station communication

command, can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Single command function The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for 16 binary output signals each. The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block has the 70O718 address. The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in table 350
Table 350:
Function block CD01-CmdInput1 CD01-CmdInput2 CD01-CmdInput3 CD01-CmdInput4 CD01-CmdInput5 CD01-CmdInput6 CD01-CmdInput7 CD01-CmdInput8 CD01-CmdInput9 CD01-CmdInput10 CD01-CmdInput11 CD01-CmdInput12 CD01-CmdInput13 CD01-CmdInput14 CD01-CmdInput15 CD01-CmdInput16 CD02-CmdInput1 CD02-CmdInput2 CD02-CmdInput3 CD02-CmdInput4 Table continued on next page

SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function


SPA address 4-S-4639 4-S-4640 4-S-4641 4-S-4642 4-S-4643 4-S-4644 4-S-4645 4-S-4646 4-S-4647 4-S-4648 4-S-4649 4-S-4650 4-S-4651 4-S-4652 4-S-4653 4-S-4654 4-S-4672 4-S-4673 4-S-4674 4-S-4675

630

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Function block CD02-CmdInput5 CD02-CmdInput6 CD02-CmdInput7 CD02-CmdInput8 CD02-CmdInput9 CD02-CmdInput10 CD02-CmdInput11 CD02-CmdInput12 CD02-CmdInput13 CD02-CmdInput14 CD02-CmdInput15 CD02-CmdInput16 CD03-CmdInput1 CD03-CmdInput2 CD03-CmdInput3 CD03-CmdInput4 CD03-CmdInput5 CD03-CmdInput6 CD03-CmdInput7 CD03-CmdInput8 CD03-CmdInput9 CD03-CmdInput10 CD03-CmdInput11 CD03-CmdInput12 CD03-CmdInput13 CD03-CmdInput14 CD03-CmdInput15 CD03-CmdInput16 SPA address 4-S-4676 4-S-4677 4-S-4678 4-S-4679 4-S-4680 4-S-4681 4-S-4682 4-S-4683 4-S-4684 4-S-4685 4-S-4686 4-S-4687 4-S-4705 4-S-4706 4-S-4707 4-S-4708 4-S-4709 4-S-4710 4-S-4711 4-S-4712 4-S-4713 4-S-4714 4-S-4715 4-S-4716 4-S-4717 4-S-4718 4-S-4719 4-S-4720

Table 350 SPA addresses for the controllable signals on the single command functions Figure 307 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection terminal for control of a circuit breaker. A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown in table 350

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

631

Section 16 Station communication

Figure 307:

Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker.

The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be steady or pulsed signals (1 = steady, 2 = pulsed). Event function This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g. operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels, and all of them must be tied to the 6 DR function blocks. All internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51). The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as: No events (event mask 0) OnSet, at pick-up of the signal (event mask 1) OnReset, at drop-out of the signal (event mask 2) OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal (event mask 3)

Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, for example, one input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker or disconnector. The double indication consists of an odd and an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a double indication, the next even input is considered to be the other input. The odd inputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00 states. To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from the PST under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:

632

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Double indication (event mask 4) Double indication with midposition suppression (event mask 5)

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning. These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the station HMI on the status indication for the odd input: 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates a close event with the read status 1 10 generates an open event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

No analog events are available for SPA. The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 351

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

633

Section 16 Station communication

Table 351:
Event block

Status and event codes


Status Single indication1) Double indication 2) Set event Reset event Intermedia Closed 01 Open 10 te 00 Unde fined 11 22 E3 22 E7 22 E1 1 22 E1 5 22 E1 9 22 E2 3 22 E2 7 22 E3 1

EV01 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 EV01 3)

2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216

22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63

22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60

22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28

22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29

22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30

EV02 EV03 EV20

230.. 240.. 410..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 23E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23 E.. 24 E.. 41 E..

1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 0, 1, 2 or 3. 2) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 4 or 5. 3) This status value contains a value with all the 16 inputs combined to a hex-value (0-FFF). Example The master requests the slave (no. 2) for latest events by addressing data category L:>2RL:CCcr

634

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

The slave sends the recent events from the buffer starting from the oldest event. If all recent events do not fit into one message, rest of recent events will not be sent until during the next request. When events are requested from the slave and the buffer of the slave is empty, the slave responds with an empty data message: If<2D::CCcrlf. Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 308

Figure 308:

Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

635

Section 16 Station communication


16.4.2.1 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module. The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation and commissioning manual for respective IED.

16.4.3

Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600. When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.

16.4.4

Setting parameters
Table 352:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate

General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function


Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd 57600 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line

636

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 353:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate

General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function


Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line

Table 354:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress

General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function


Range Off On 1 - 899 Step 1 Default Off 30 Unit Description Operation Slave address

16.4.5

Technical data
Table 355:
Function Protocol Communication speed Slave number

SPA communication protocol


Value SPA 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd 1 to 899

16.5
16.5.1

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol


Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

16.5.2
16.5.2.1

Principle of operation
General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

637

Section 16 Station communication

principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Introduction of IEC 608705103 protocol

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103

The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection and control IED. Commands in control direction Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals. Number of instances: 1 Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no 19 23 24 25 26 Message LED Reset Activate setting group 1 Activate setting group 2 Activate setting group 3 Activate setting group 4 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD 638 Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. 16 17 18 Message Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off Supported Yes Yes Yes

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals. Number of instances: 4 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Output signal 01 Output signal 02 Output signal 03 Output signal 04 Output signal 05 Output signal 06 Output signal 07 Output signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions. Number of instances: 1 Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

639

Section 16 Station communication


Info. no. 19 23 24 25 26 21 Message LED reset Setting group 1 active Setting group 2 active Setting group 3 active Setting group 4 active Test mode active Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals. Number of instances: 20 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Input signal 01 Input signal 02 Input signal 03 Input signal 04 Input signal 05 Input signal 06 Input signal 07 Input signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no. 32 33 37 38 46 47 Message Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision U I>>back-up operation VT fuse failure Group warning Group alarm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

640

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. 51 52 Message Earth fault forward Earth fault reverse Supported Yes Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. The instance type is suitable for distance protection function. FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 78 79 80 81 82 76 77 73 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Signal transmitted Signal received SCL, Fault location in ohm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

641

Section 16 Station communication


Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault protection functions. FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system N Over current trip I> Over current trip I>> Earth fault trip IN> Earth fault trip IN>> Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.

642

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Info. no. 16 128 130 Message Autorecloser active CB on by Autorecloser Autorecloser blocked Supported Yes Yes Yes

Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU. Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1 The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals. Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value. Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no. 148 144, 145, 148 148 147 148 148 148 145, 146 147 146, 148 146, 148 148 Message IL1 IL2 IL3 IN, Neutral current UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1-UL2 UN, Neutral voltage P, active power Q, reactive power f, frequency Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no. Message Meas1 Meas2 Meas3 Supported Yes Yes Yes

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

643

Section 16 Station communication


Info. no. Message Meas4 Meas5 Meas6 Meas7 Meas8 Meas9 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard. Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with: IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1 IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1 VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95. Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER. Disturbance Upload All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again. When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance. Deviations from the standard

644

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in Rex67x. This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard. ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether: Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start/pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP TM OTEV Recorded fault with trip. [1] Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0] Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance. ASDU26 When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

645

Section 16 Station communication


Interoperability, physical layer
Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS-485 number of loads Optical interface glass fibre plastic fibre Transmission speed 96000 bit/s 19200 bit/s Link Layer DFC-bit used Connectors connector F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Interoperability, application layer


Supported Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction ASDU 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 Time-tagged message Time-tagged message with rel. time Measurands I Time-tagged message with rel. time Identification Time synchronization End of general interrogation Measurands II Generic data Generic identification List of recorded disturbances Ready for transm. of disturbance data Ready for transm. of a channel Ready for transm of tags Transmission of tags Transmission fo disturbance data End of transmission Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction Table continued on next page

646

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Supported ASDU 6 7 10 20 21 24 25 Time synchronization General interrogation Generic data General command Generic command Order for disturbance data transmission Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

Selection of basic application functions Test mode Blocking of monitoring direction Disturbance data Private data Generic services No Yes Yes Yes No

16.5.2.2

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

16.5.3

Function block
BLOCK ICMAI103IEDCMD 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4 en05000689.vsd

ICMDI103CMD BLOCK 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT en05000684.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

647

Section 16 Station communication

BLOCK

ICM1I103UserCMD OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 en05000693.vsd

IEV1I103IED BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM en05000688.vsd

IS01I103UsrDef BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 en05000694.vsd

ISU1I103Superv BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL en05000692.vsd

ISEFI103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV en05000685.vsd

648

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

IZ01I103FltDis BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG en05000686.vsd

IFL1I103FltStd BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG en05000687.vsd

IAR1I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU en05000683.vsd

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

649

Section 16 Station communication

IMM1I103Meas BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F en05000690.vsd

IMU1I103MeasUsr BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 en05000691.vsd

16.5.4

Input and output signals


Table 356:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 357:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block


Description Block of commands

Table 358:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block


Description Block of commands

Table 359:
Signal BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1

Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, setting group 1 is active

Table continued on next page

650

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Signal 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM Description Information number 24, setting group 2 is active Information number 25, setting group 3 is active Information number 26, setting group 4 is active Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 360:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block


Description Block of commands

Table 361:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8

Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Binary signal Input 1 Binary signal input 2 Binary signal input 3 Binary signal input 4 Binary signal input 5 Binary signal input 6 Binary signal input 7 Binary signal input 8

Table 362:
Signal BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL

Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Information number 32, measurand supervision of I Information number 33, measurand supervision of U Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection Information number 38, fuse failure VT Information number 46, group warning Information number 47, group alarm

Table 363:
Signal BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV

Input signals for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Information number 51, earth-fault forward Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

651

Section 16 Station communication

Table 364:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG

Input signals for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual current IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 78, zone 1 Information number 79, zone 2 Information number 79, zone 3 Information number 79, zone 4 Information number 79, zone 5 Information number 76, signal transmitted Information number 77, signal recevied Information number 73, fault location in ohm Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE) Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 365:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP

Input signals for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function block


Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual curent IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 85, breaker failure

Table continued on next page

652

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Signal 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG Description Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N Information number 90, over current trip, stage low Information number 91, over current trip, stage high Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 366:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9

Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block


Description Block of service value reporting Service value for measurement on input 1 Service value for measurement on input 2 Service value for measurement on input 3 Service value for measurement on input 4 Service value for measurement on input 5 Service value for measurement on input 6 Service value for measurement on input 7 Service value for measurement on input 8 Service value for measurement on input 9

Table 367:
Signal BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F

Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block


Description Block of service value reporting Service value for current phase L1 Service value for current phase L2 Service value for current phase L3 Service value for residual current IN Service value for voltage phase L1 Service value for voltage phase L2 Service value for voltage phase L3 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2 Service value for residual voltage UN Service value for active power Service value for reactive power Service value for system frequency

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

653

Section 16 Station communication

Table 368:
Signal 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT

Output signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block


Description Information number 16, block of autorecloser Information number 17, block of differential protection Information number 18, block of protection

Table 369:
Signal 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4

Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block


Description Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, activate setting group 1 Information number 24, activate setting group 2 Information number 25, activate setting group 3 Information number 26, activate setting group 4

Table 370:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8

Output signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block


Description Command output 1 Command output 2 Command output 3 Command output 4 Command output 5 Command output 6 Command output 7 Command output 8

16.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 371:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e

General settings for the I103viaSLM (IOW1-) function


Range 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments

654

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 372:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e

General settings for the I103_SLM_ABS (IECC-) function


Range 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments

Table 373:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 374:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 255 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 375:
Parameter PULSEMOD

General settings for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function


Range 0-1 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Mode Description Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255)

T FUNTYPE INFNO_1

0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255

0.001 1 1

0.400 1 1

s FunT InfNo

INFNO_2

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_3

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_4

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_5

1 - 255

InfNo

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

655

Section 16 Station communication


Parameter INFNO_6 Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 6 Unit InfNo Description Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)

INFNO_7

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_8

1 - 255

InfNo

Table 376:
Parameter RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2

General settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function


Range 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 Default 3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 Unit A A A A kV kV kV kV Description Rated current phase L1 Rated current phase L2 Rated current phase L3 Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase L1 Rated voltage for phase L2 Rated voltage for phase L3 Rated voltage for phase-phase L1L2 Rated residual voltage UN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)

RatedUN RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE

0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255

0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1

230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1

kV MW MVA Hz FunT

656

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 377:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO

General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function


Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 25 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2 Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9

RatedMeasur1

0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur2

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur3

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur4

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur5

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur6

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur7

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur8

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur9

0.05

1000.00

Table 378:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 160 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 379:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 128 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

657

Section 16 Station communication

Table 380:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 381:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function


Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 382:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO_1

General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function


Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 5 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255) Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)

INFNO_2

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_3

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_4

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_5

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_6

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_7

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_8

1 - 255

InfNo

16.5.6

Technical data

658

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication

Table 383:
Function Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol


Value IEC 60870-5-103 9600, 19200 Bd

Communication speed

16.6
16.6.1

Single command, 16 signals (CD)


Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

16.6.2

Principle of operation
The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

659

Section 16 Station communication 16.6.3 Function block


CD01SingleCmd BLOCK OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000698.vsd

16.6.4

Input and output signals


Table 384:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 Table continued on next page

Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block


Description Single command output 1 Single command output 2 Single command output 3 Single command output 4 Single command output 5 Single command output 6 Single command output 7 Single command output 8 Single command output 9 Single command output 10 Single command output 11 Single command output 12 Single command output 13 Single command output 14

660

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Signal OUT15 OUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 Description Single command output 15 Single command output 16 User defined string for single command output 1 User defined string for single command output 2 User defined string for single command output 3 User defined string for single command output 4 User defined string for single command output 5 User defined string for single command output 6 User defined string for single command output 7 User defined string for single command output 8 User defined string for single command output 9 User defined string for single command output 10 User defined string for single command output 11 User defined string for single command output 12 User defined string for single command output 13 User defined string for single command output 14 User defined string for single command output 15 User defined string for single command output 16

Table 385:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block


Description Block single command function

16.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 386:
Parameter Mode

General settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function


Range Off Steady Pulsed Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

661

Section 16 Station communication

16.7
16.7.1

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)


Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/ inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.

16.7.2

Principle of operation
Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670. Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT). Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are available in the IED 670s. The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.

16.7.3
16.7.3.1

Design
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool. 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic RED 670

662

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 16 Station communication

connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

16.7.4

Function block
CM01MultiCmd BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID en06000007.vsd

Figure 309:

CM function block

MT01MultiTransm BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR

en06000008.vsd

Figure 310:

MT function block

16.7.5

Input and output signals


Table 387:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block


Description Block of function

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

663

Section 16 Station communication

Table 388:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block


Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 389:
Signal ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14

Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block


Description MultiReceive error New data is received Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14

Table continued on next page

664

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 16 Station communication


Signal OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID Description Output 15 Output 16 Output data is valid

Table 390:
Signal ERROR

Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block


Description MultiSend error

16.7.6

Setting parameters
Table 391:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime

General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function


Range 0.050 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 11.000 Unit s Description Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Mode tPulseTime

Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000

0.001

Steady 0.200

Table 392:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime

General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function


Range 0.000 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

665

666

Section 17 Remote communication

Section 17 Remote communication


About this chapter
This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

17.1

Binary signal transfer to remote end


Function block name: BSR--, BST-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSDGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

17.1.1

Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs. Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication with four remote IEDs.

17.1.2

Principle of operation
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

667

Section 17 Remote communication

Start flag 8 bits

Information n x 16 bits

CRC 16 bits

Stop flag 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 311:

Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mixe the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values. When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.

17.1.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

668

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 17 Remote communication

CRM1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000043.vsd

CRM2LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000044.vsd

Figure 312:

CRM function blocks

CRB1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGT HERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL en05000451.vsd

Figure 313:

CRB function block

17.1.4

Input and output signals


Table 393:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR Table continued on next page

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block


Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

669

Section 17 Remote communication


Signal LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL Description Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

Table 394:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block


Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

Table 395:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block


Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Low signal level on the receive link

670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 17 Remote communication 17.1.5 Setting parameters


Table 396:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function


Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 Echo GPS Block Echo

1 -

0 - 255 Echo

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500

Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

100

ms

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

ms

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

Table continued on next page

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

671

Section 17 Remote communication


Parameter MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21 Range 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On Step 1 1 Default 600 300 Off Unit us us Description Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 397:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function


Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 Echo GPS Block Echo

1 -

0 - 255 Echo

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChann el 5 - 500

Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

100

ms

Table continued on next page

672

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 17 Remote communication


Parameter AsymDelay Range -20.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit ms Description Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21

1 1 -

600 300 Off

us us -

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 398:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function


Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo CommSync

0 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500

1 -

0 - 255 Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

InvertPolX21

Off On

Off

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

673

674

Section 18 Hardware

Section 18 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.

18.1
18.1.1

Overview
Variants of case- and HMI display size

xx04000458.eps

Figure 314:

1/2 19 case with medium HMI display.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

675

Section 18 Hardware

xx04000459.eps

Figure 315:

1/2 19 case with small HMI display.

Figure 316:

3/4 19 case with medium HMI display.

xx05000763.eps

Figure 317:

3/4 19 case with small HMI display.

676

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

xx04000460.eps

Figure 318:

1/1 19 case with medium HMI display.

xx04000461.eps

Figure 319:

1/1 19 case with small HMI display.

18.1.2

Case from the rear side

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

677

Section 18 Hardware

Table 399:

Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 X51 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401

Table 400:

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module PSM BIM, BOM, IOM or MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102 X101 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401

678

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Table 401:

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2TRM slot

Module PSM BIM, BOM, IOM or MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X72 X71 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401, 411

Table 402:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162 X31, X41, etc. or X161 X161 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

679

Section 18 Hardware

Table 403:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module PSM BIM, BOM or IOM MIM GSM SLM LDCM LDCM OEM LDCM LDCM TRM 1 TRM 2

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132 X31, X41, etc. or X131 X131 X301:A, B, C, D X302:A, B X303:A, B X311:A, B, C, D X312:A, B X313:A, B X401 X411

18.2
18.2.1

Hardware modules
Overview
Table 404:
Module Combined backplane module (CBM)

Basic modules, always included


Description A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not connected directly to this board. A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc. Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits. An internal fail alarm output is available.

Universal backplane module (UBM) Power supply module (PSM)

Numerical module (NUM)

Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED. Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs. Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI)

Transformer input module (TRM)

Analog digital conversion module (ADM)

680

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Table 405:
Module

Application specific modules


Description Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs. Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal. Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103 communication PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication. Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels. Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.

Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Line data communication modules (LDCM), short range, medium range, longrange, X21 Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 communication modules (SLM) Optical ethernet module (OEM) mA input module (MIM) GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

18.2.2
18.2.2.1

Combined backplane module (CBM)


Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.

18.2.2.2

Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible. Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules. If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.

18.2.2.3

Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM: with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

681

Section 18 Hardware

used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 321 with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 320

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

2
en05000516.vsd

Figure 320:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots

CBM for 1 TRM.

2 en05000755.vsd

Figure 321:
Pos Description 1 CAN slots

CBM for 2 TRM.

682

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

CPCI slots

en05000756.vsd

Figure 322:
Pos Description 1 CBM

CBM position, rear view.

18.2.3
18.2.3.1

Universal backplane module (UBM)


Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

18.2.3.2

Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analogue signals from the transformer input module to the analogue digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet and D-sub contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.

18.2.3.3

Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

683

Section 18 Hardware

The UBM exists in 2 versions. for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 324 for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 325.

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

TRM

ADM

NUM

AD Data
X1 X2 X4

X3

RS485 X10 X10

Front port

Ethernet

LHMI connection
Ethernet X5

en05000489.vsd

Figure 323:

UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd

Figure 324:

UBM for 1 TRM.

684

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

en05000758.vsd

Figure 325:

UBM for 2 TRM.

en05000759.vsd

Figure 326:
Pos Description 1 UBM

UBM position, rear view.

18.2.4
18.2.4.1

Power supply module (PSM)


Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

685

Section 18 Hardware
18.2.4.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 406. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.

Block diagram

Input connector

Filter

Power supply

Supervision

99000516.vsd

Figure 327:

PSM Block diagram.

18.2.4.3

Technical data
Table 406:
Quantity Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) Power consumption Auxiliary DC power in-rush

PSM - Power supply module


Rated value EL = (24 - 60) V EL = (90 - 250) V 50 W typically < 5 A during 0.1 s Nominal range EL 20% EL 20% -

18.2.5
18.2.5.1

Numeric processing module (NUM)


Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions and logic.

686

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Backplane connector

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.

18.2.5.2

Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector. The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PCMIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as OEM or LDCM can be mounted. To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC slot and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge. The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system. During power up the application code is moved to and then executed from the DRAM. The code is stored in the flash memory because it is nonvolatile and executed in DRAM because of the higher performance of DRAM. The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock. No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

687

Section 18 Hardware
18.2.5.3 Block diagram

Compact Flash

Logic

PMC connector PC-MIP

Memory

Ethernet

North bridge PCI-PCIbridge


Backplane connector
en04000473.vsd

CPU

Figure 328:

Numeric processing module block diagram

18.2.6

Local human-machine interface (LHMI)


Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.

18.2.7
18.2.7.1

Transformer input module (TRM)


Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations.

688

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

UBM connector

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware
18.2.7.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers. Basic versions: 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels

The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order. The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM. Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)".

18.2.7.3

Technical data
Table 407:
Quantity Current Operative range Permissive overload Burden Ac voltage Operative range Permissive overload Burden Frequency
*)

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits


Rated value Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-100) x Ir 4 Ir cont. 100 Ir for 1 s *) < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A Ur = 110 V (0340) V 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s < 20 mVA at 110 V fr = 50/60 Hz 5% 0.5288 V Nominal range (0.2-40) Ir

max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

18.2.8
18.2.8.1

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM)


Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analogue inputs, 2 PCMIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PCMIP slot is used for the LDCM card and the PMC slot for the SLM and

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

689

Section 18 Hardware

OEM modules. The OEM card should always be mounted on the NUM board if only one card is needed. In cases where two cards are needed then the PCM slot on the ADM may be used for the second OEM. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).

18.2.8.2

Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter. Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency. The A\D converted signals go through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

690

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

AD1 AD2
1.2v

AD3 AD4

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd

Figure 329:

The ADM layout

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

691

Section 18 Hardware 18.2.9


18.2.9.1

Binary input module (BIM)


Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

18.2.9.2

Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)". A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set. Figure 330 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels. The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.

692

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

[V] 300

176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V RL24 48/60V RL48 110/125V RL110 220/250V RL220
xx99000517.vsd

Figure 330:

Voltage dependence for the binary inputs


Guaranteed operation Operation uncertain No operation

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 331 and 332.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

693

Section 18 Hardware

[mA] 30

1 35 70 [ms]
en03000108.vsd

Figure 331:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA] 30

1 3.5 7.0 [ms]


en05000455.vsd

Figure 332:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

694

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Opto isolated input

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller

Opto isolated input


CAN

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 333:

Block diagram of the Binary input module.

18.2.9.3

Technical data
Table 408:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

BIM - Binary input module


Rated value 16 RL24 (24/40) V RL48 (48/60) V RL110 (110/125) V RL220 (220/250) V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V Counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator

Backplane connector
-

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Process connector

Opto isolated input

Memory

695

Section 18 Hardware

Table 409:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities


Rated value 16 RL24 (24/40) V RL48 (48/60) V RL110 (110/125) V RL220 (220/250) V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max 40 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V Counter input frequency Balanced counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator

18.2.10
18.2.10.1

Binary output modules (BOM)


Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any signalling purpose.

18.2.10.2

Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 334. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED. The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required. For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".

696

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Output module

3
xx00000299.vsd

Figure 334:
1 2 3

Relay pair example

Output connection from relay 1 Output signal power source connection Output connection from relay 2

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

697

Section 18 Hardware

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Process connector

Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Relay
Trip and Signal relays 24 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A

Microcontroller

Memory

99000505.vsd

Figure 335:

Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

18.2.10.3

Technical data
Table 410:
Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Table continued on next page

BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

698

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Backplane connector

Process connector

CAN

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware
Function or quantity Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms Trip and Signal relays 30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A

18.2.11
18.2.11.1

Binary input/output module (IOM)


Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.

18.2.11.2

Design
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 331. Inputs are debounced by software. Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults, see figure 330. The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present. The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 336. The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay. For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to sections "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

699

Section 18 Hardware

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

Figure 336:

Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc.

18.2.11.3

Technical data

700

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Table 411:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

IOM - Binary input/output module


Rated value 8 RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption RL24 = (24/40) V RL48 = (48/60) V RL110 = (110/125) V RL220 = (220/250) V

Table 412:

IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays 10 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) 2 250 V AC, DC 800 V DC

Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

8A 10 A

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A -

0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF

Maximum capacitive load

18.2.12
18.2.12.1

Line data communication module (LDCM)


Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and receives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is used. The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

701

Section 18 Hardware

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available. Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.

18.2.12.2

Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on: the ADM the NUM

ID

ST

IO-connector

ST

32,768 MHz

16.000 MHz

en05000473.vsd

Figure 337:

The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
ADN 2841 2.5V ID

DS 3904

DS 3904

FPGA 256 FBGA

PCI9054 TQ176

MAX 3645

3 2

en06000393.vsd

Figure 338:

The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

702

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware
18.2.12.3 Technical data
Table 413:
Characteristic Type of LDCM Type of fibre

Line data communication modules (LDCM)


Range or value Short range (SR) Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm or 50/125 mm 820 nm 11 dB (typical distance about 2 mile/3 km *) 7 dB (typical distance about 1 mile/2 km *) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Singlemode 8/125 mm Singlemode 8/125 mm

Wave length Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm

1310 nm 20 dB (typical distance 50 mile/ 80 km *)

1550 nm 26 dB (typical distance 75 mile/120 km *)

Optical connector Protocol Data transmission Transmission rate Clock source

Type ST C37.94 Synchronous 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

18.2.13
18.2.13.1

Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM)


Introduction
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial communication and one dedicated for LON communication.

18.2.13.2

Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fibre connectors, see figure 339. The plastic fibre connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fibre connectors are of ST type.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

703

Section 18 Hardware

Figure 339:

The SLM variants

A Snap in connector for plastic fibre B ST connector for glass fibre 1 2 LON port SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Figure 340:
1 Receiver, LON

The SLM layout overview

2 Transmitter, LON 3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

704

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware
18.2.13.3 Technical data
Table 414:
Quantity Optical connector Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter

SLM LON port


Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 415:
Quantity Optical connector

SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port


Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (25 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm

Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter

*) depending on optical budget calculation

18.2.14
18.2.14.1

Optical ethernet module (OEM)


Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

18.2.14.2

Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented. Refer to section "Line data communication module (LDCM)" for further information.

18.2.14.3

Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PCM card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM. If a second OEM is needed it is mounted on the NUM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

705

Section 18 Hardware

PCI - bus Connector EEPROM Ethernet Controller

100Base-FX Transmitter 100Base-FX Receiver

ST fiber optic connectors

PCI - PCI Bridge

ID chip EEPROM IO - bus Connector

100Base-FX Transmitter Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver ST fiber optic connectors

en04000472.vsd

Figure 341:

OEM block diagram.

ID chip

LED
25MHz oscillator

Ethernet cont.

Transmitter

Receiver

Ethernet cont.

Transmitter

25MHz oscillator

PCI to PCI bridge

en05000472.vsd

Figure 342:

OEM layout, standard PCM format

18.2.14.4

Technical data
Quantity Number of channels Standard Type of fibre Wave length Optical connector Communication speed Rated value 1 or 2 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre 1300 nm Type ST Fast Ethernet 100 MB

706

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

PCI bus

LED

IO bus

Receiver

Section 18 Hardware 18.2.15


18.2.15.1

mA input module (MIM)


Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

18.2.15.2

Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)". The analog inputs measure DC and low frequency currents in the range of +/- 20mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module. The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

707

Section 18 Hardware

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC

Process connector

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Memory

Microcontroller

99000504.vsd

Figure 343:

mA input module block diagram

18.2.15.3

Technical data
Table 416:
Quantity: Input range Input resistance Power consumption each mA-board each mA input

MIM - mA input module


Rated value: 5, 10, 20mA 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA Rin = 194 Ohm 4W 0.1 W Nominal range: -

708

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Backplane connector

CAN

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware 18.2.16


18.2.16.1

GPS time synchronization module (GSM)


Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.

18.2.16.2

Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot closest to the NUM shall always be used. The GSM consists of CAN carrier module (CCM) GPS clock module (GCM) GPS receiver unit

The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PCM card and GPS unit, see figure 345. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electromagnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus. The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level.
PMC GPS antenna GPS receiver GPS clock module
CMPPS

CAN controller

CAN

en05000675.vsd

Figure 344:

GSM block diagram

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Backplane CAN connector

709

Section 18 Hardware

xx05000471.vsd

Figure 345:
1 GPS receiver

A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables

2 GPS Clock module (GCM) 3 CAN carrier module (CCM) 4 Antenna connector

18.2.16.3

Technical data
Table 417:
Function Receiver Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours

GPS time synchronization module (GSM)


Range or value <30 minutes <15 minutes <5 minutes Accuracy 1s relative UTC

710

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware 18.2.17


18.2.17.1

GPS antenna
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used.

18.2.17.2

Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 346
1 6

2 3

xx04000155.vsd

Figure 346:
where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Antenna with console

GPS antenna TNC connector Console, 78x150 mm Mounting holes 5.5 mm Tab for securing of antenna cable Vertical mounting position Horizontal mounting position

Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

711

Section 18 Hardware

99001046.vsd

Figure 347:

Antenna line-of-sight

Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz. Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

18.2.17.3

Technical data
Table 418:
Function Max antenna cable attenuation Antenna cable impedance Lightning protection Antenna cable connector

GPS Antenna and cable


Value 26 db @ 1.6 GHz 50 ohm Must be provided externally SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end

712

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

18.3
18.3.1

Case dimensions
Case without rear cover

D A
F

C
xx04000448.vsd

G H

Figure 348:

Case without rear cover Figure 349:

xx04000464.vsd

Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9 265.9

B 223.7 336.0 448.3

C 201.1 201.1 201.1

D 252.9 252.9 252.9

E 205.7 318.0 430.3

F 190.5 190.5 190.5

G 203.7 316.0 428.3

H 465.1

J 187.6 187.6 187.6

K 482.6 (mm)

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

18.3.2

Case with rear cover

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

713

Section 18 Hardware

K
D A

G
C
xx05000501.vsd

J
xx05000502.vsd

Figure 350:

Case with rear cover.

Figure 351:

Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit.

xx05000503.vsd

Figure 352:

Rear cover case with details.

Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

A 265.9 265.9 265.9

B 223.7 336.0 448.3

C 242.1 242.1 242.1

D 255.8 255.8 255.8

E 205.7 318.0 430.3

F 190.5 190.5 190.5

G 203.7 316.0 428.3

H 465.1

J 228.6 228.6 228.6

K 482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit. All dimensions are in millimeters.

714

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware 18.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A B

E D
xx04000465.vsd

Figure 353:

Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm) B +/-1 210.1 322.4 434.7 C 254.3 254.3 254.3 D 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 12.5 12.5 12.5

Case size Tolerance A +/-1 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

715

Section 18 Hardware 18.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd

Figure 354:

A 1/2 x 19 size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.

A
G

C
xx05000505.vsd

Figure 355:

Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

716

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Case size (mm) Tolerance 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

A 1 214.0 326.4 438.7

B 1 259.3 259.3 259.3

C 1 240.4 352.8 465.1

D 1 190.5 190.5 190.5

E 1 34.4 34.4 34.4

F 1 13.2 13.2 13.2

G 1 6.4 diam 6.4 diam 6.4 diam

18.3.5

Wall mounting dimensions

A B E

en04000471.vsd

Figure 356:

Wall mounting

Case size (mm) 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

A 292.0 404.3 516.0

B 267.1 379.4 491.1

C 272.8 272.8 272.8

D 390.0 390.0 390.0

E 243.0 243.0 243.0

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

717

Section 18 Hardware 18.3.6 External resistor unit


WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!
[1.48] [6.97] [4.02]

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

Dimension mm [inches]

xx06000232.eps

Figure 357:
[1.50]

Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[inches]

en06000234.eps

Figure 358:

Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

718

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

18.4
18.4.1
18.4.1.1

Mounting alternatives
Flush mounting
Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases, can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection. The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases. Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

719

Section 18 Hardware
18.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting
1 7

2 6 3 4 5

xx06000246.vsd

Figure 359:
PosNo 1

Flush mounting details.


Description Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate. Fastener Groove Screw, self tapping Joining point of sealing strip (rear view) Panel Screw Quantity Type -

2 3 4 5 6 7

4 4 4

2,9x9,5 mm M5x25

18.4.2
18.4.2.1

19 panel rack mounting


Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws

720

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle. Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

18.4.2.2

Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting


2

1a

1b

xx04000452.vs d

Figure 360:
PosNo 1a, 1b 2

19 panel rack mounting details


Quantity 2 8 Type M4x6

Description Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the left or right side of the case. Screw

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

721

Section 18 Hardware 18.4.3


18.4.3.1

Wall mounting
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle. When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).

18.4.3.2

Mounting procedure for wall mounting


3 2 1 4

5 6 xx04000453.vs d

Figure 361:

Wall mounting details.

722

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

PosNo 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Bushing Screw Screw Mounting bar Screw Side plate

Quantity 4 8 4 2 6 2

Type M4x10 M6x12 or corresponding M5x8 -

18.4.3.3

How to reach the rear side of the IED


The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use with this type of mounting. See figure 362. To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side.
View from above 1 3

80 mm

en06000135.vsd

Figure 362:
PosNo 1 2 3

How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.


Description Screw Screw Rear protection cover Type M4x10 M5x8 -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

723

Section 18 Hardware 18.4.4


18.4.4.1

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting


Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

18.4.4.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting


2 1

xx04000456.vsd

Figure 363:
PosNo 1 2, 3 4

Side-by-side rack mounting details.


Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -

18.4.4.3

IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case


An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.

724

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

xx06000180.vsd

Figure 364:

IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base.

18.4.5
18.4.5.1

Side-by-side flush mounting


Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19. With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

725

Section 18 Hardware
18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
1 2

3 4

xx06000181.vsd

Figure 365:

Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19 IED).


Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -

PosNo 1 2, 3 4

18.5
18.5.1

Technical data
Enclosure
Table 419:
Material Front plate Surface treatment Finish

Case
Steel sheet Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Aluzink preplated steel Light grey (RAL 7035)

726

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware

Table 420:
Front

Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529


IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip) IP20

Rear, sides, top and bottom

Table 421:
Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

Weight
Weight 10 kg 15 kg 18 kg

18.5.2

Connection system
Table 422:
Connector type Terminal blocks of feed through type

CT and VT circuit connectors


Rated voltage and current 250 V AC, 20 A Maximum conductor area 4 mm2

Table 423:
Connector type

Binary I/O connection system


Rated voltage 250 V AC Maximum conductor area 2.5 mm2 2 1 mm2

Screw compression type

18.5.3

Influencing factors
Table 424:
Parameter Ambient temperature, operate value Relative humidity Operative range Storage temperature

Temperature and humidity influence


Reference value +20 C 10%-90% 0%-95% -40 C to +70 C Nominal range -10 C to +55 C 10%-90% Influence 0.02% /C -

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

727

Section 18 Hardware

Table 425:
Dependence on

Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation


Reference value max. 2% Full wave rectified Within nominal range Influence 12% of EL 20% of EL 24-60 V DC 20% 90-250 V DC 20% No restart Correct function <140 s 0.01% /% 0.01% /%

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage Interruption interval 050 ms 0 s Restart time

Table 426:
Dependence on

Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602556)


Within nominal range fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr Influence 1.0% / Hz 1.0% 6.0%

Frequency dependence, operate value Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content)

18.5.4

Type tests according to standard


Table 427:
Test 1 MHz burst disturbance 100 kHz disturbance Electrostatic discharge Direct applicaton Indirect application Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity test Power frequency immunity test Power frequency magnetic field test Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Table continued on next page

Electromagnetic compatibility
Type test values 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 4 kV 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms high energy 150-300 V, 50 Hz 1000 A/m, 3 s 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz 35 V/m 26-1000 MHz Reference standards IEC 60255-22-1, Class III IEC 61000-4-12, Class III IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV IEC 60255-22-4, Class A IEC 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-7, Class A IEC 61000-4-8, Class V IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

728

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 18 Hardware
Test Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated emission Conducted emission Type test values 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz 30-1000 MHz 0.15-30 MHz Reference standards IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-25 IEC 60255-25

Table 428:
Test Dielectric test

Insulation
Type test values 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J >100 MW at 500 VDC Reference standard IEC 60255-5

Impulse voltage test Insulation resistance

Table 429:
Test Cold test Storage test Dry heat test

Environmental tests
Type test value Test Ad for 16 h at -25C Test Ad for 16 h at -40C Test Bd for 16 h at +70C Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93% Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours) Reference standard IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30

Damp heat test, steady state Damp heat test, cyclic

Table 430:
Test Immunity Emissivity

CE compliance
According to EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-4 EN 50178

Low voltage directive

Table 431:
Test Vibration Shock and bump Seismic

Mechanical tests
Type test values Class I Class I Class I Reference standards IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

729

730

Section 19 Labels

Section 19 Labels
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on the IED.

19.1

Different labels

1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
xx06000574.eps

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

731

Section 19 Labels

1 2 3 4 5 6

Product type, description and serial number Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency Optional, customer specific information Manufacturer Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages Transformer designations

Ordering and serial number

732

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 19 Labels

1 2 3

4
en06000573.eps

1 2 3

Warning label Caution label Class 1 laser product label

Warning label

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

733

734

Section 20 Connection diagrams

Section 20 Connection diagrams


This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical connections to the IED.

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

735

Section 20 Connection diagrams

736

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

737

Section 20 Connection diagrams

738

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

739

Section 20 Connection diagrams

740

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

741

Section 20 Connection diagrams

742

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

743

Section 20 Connection diagrams

744

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

745

Section 20 Connection diagrams

746

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 20 Connection diagrams

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

747

Section 20 Connection diagrams

748

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics


About this chapter
This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

21.1

Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.

I>
Figure 366:

I>

I>
xx05000129.vsd

Three overcurrent protections connected in series


Stage 3

Time Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 1

Stage 1

Fault point position

en05000130.vsd

Figure 367:

Definite time overcurrent characteristics

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

749

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point position


en05000131.vsd

Figure 368:

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections. To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series: Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.


A1 B1

Feeder

I>

I>

Time axis

t=0

t=t1

t=t2

t=t3
en05000132.vsd

Figure 369:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2

Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

is The fault occurs is Protection B1 trips is Breaker at B1 opens

750

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

t=t3

is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped. In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications: If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system. Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault. Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.

21.2
21.2.1

Principle of operation
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr. Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen. If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

751

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations. In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed. For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC Definite time) are chosen. The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 109.

A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
where: p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type, in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

(Equation 109)

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

(top - B k )

i p - C = Ak in >

(Equation 110)

where: top is the operation time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 111, in addition to the constant time delay:

i p - C dt A k in > 0
t

(Equation 111)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

752

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Dt

i( j ) p - C A k j =1 in >
n

(Equation 112)

where: j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when

i in >
Dt n i (j)

>1

is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm, is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a trip is given and is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of characteristics in table 432 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 432:
Curve name Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely. Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse

Curve name and index no.


Curve index no. 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 433:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

753

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 433:

Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics


A 28.2 19.61 0.0086 0.0515 64.07 28.55 0.086 B 0.1217 0.491 0.0185 0.1140 0.250 0.712 0.185 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p 2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 2.0 2.0 0.02

Parameter/operationMode 1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 2 = ANSI Very inverse 3 = ANSI Inverse 4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 8 = ANSI Long-time inverse

For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 434:
Table 434: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
A(b) 0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 p (a) 0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0

Parameter/operationMode 9 = IEC Normal inverse 10 = IEC Very inverse 11 = IEC Inverse 12 = IEC Extremely inverse 13 = IEC Short-time inverse 14 = IEC Long-time inverse

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see figure 370.

754

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Operate time

tnMin

Current
en05000133.vsd

Figure 370:

Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse. The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 114:

k t[ s ] = in > 0.339 - 0.235 i


where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

(Equation 114)

The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive earth faults. The curve is described by equation 115:

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

755

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln

i k in >

(Equation 115)

where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current

If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 116.

A t[ s ] = + Bk p i -C in >

(Equation 116)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed in table 435.
Table 435:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset

Reset type delays


Curve index no. 1 2 3

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 117.

756

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

tr t[ s ] = i 2 -1 in >
where: The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

(Equation 117)

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 118:

tr t[ s ] = i pr - cr in >

(Equation 118)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

21.3

Inverse characteristics

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

757

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 436:
Function

Inverse time characteristics ANSI


Range or value k = 0.05-999 in steps of 0.01 unless otherwise stated Accuracy -

Operate characteristic:

t =

A P ( I - 1)

+ B k

Reset characteristic:
t = tr
2

(I

-1

I = Imeasured/Iset ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 ANSI Very inverse no 2 ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, tr=29.1 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0, tr=21.6 A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46 A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of 0.01 A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5 + 30 ms

Table 437:
Function

Inverse time characteristics IEC


Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy -

Operate characteristic:

t =

A P k ( I - 1)

I = Imeasured/Iset Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time IEC Normal Inverse no 9 IEC Very inverse no 10 IEC Inverse no 11 IEC Extremely inverse no 12 IEC Short-time inverse no 13 IEC Long-time inverse no 14 Table continued on next page (0.000-60.000) s A=0.14, P=0.02 A=13.5, P=1.0 A=0.14, P=0.02 A=80.0, P=2.0 A=0.05, P=0.04 A=120, P=1.0 0.5% of set time 10 ms IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

758

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics


Function Customer defined characteristic no 17 Operate characteristic: Range or value k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1 A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01 C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001 CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 k=(0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms

t =

A P (I - C )

+ B k

Reset characteristic:
t = TR
PR

(I

- CR

I = Imeasured/Iset RI inverse characteristic no 18


t = 1 k

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

0.339 -

0.236 I

I = Imeasured/Iset Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19


t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

k
I

I = Imeasured/Iset

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

759

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 438:
Function Type A curve:

Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

t =

U < -U

U<

U< = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01


2.0

t =

k 480

32 U < -U - 0.5 U <

+ 0.055

U< = Uset U = Umeasured Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

kA +D t = P U < -U -C B U <
U< = Uset U = Umeasured

760

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 439:
Function Type A curve:
t =

Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

U -U > U>

U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:


t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

2.0

- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

Type C curve:
t =

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

3.0

- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

Programmable curve:
t = kA +D

B U - U > U >

-C

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

761

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 440:
Function Type A curve:
t =

Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

U -U > U>

U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:


t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01


k 480
2.0

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

- 0.035

Type C curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01


k 480
3.0

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

- 0.035

Programmable curve:

t =

kA

B U - U > U >

-C

+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

762

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10 7 5 3 2

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000764.vsd

Figure 371:

ANSI Extremely inverse

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

763

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000765.vsd

Figure 372:

ANSI Very inverse

764

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000766.vsd

Figure 373:

ANSI Inverse

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

765

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

k=

10

15 10 7 5 3 2

1 0.5

0.1

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000767.vsd

Figure 374:

Moderately inverse

766

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 1.1 0.9 0.7

0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

0.1

0.05

0.01

10

100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd

Figure 375:

IEC Normal inverse

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

767

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

1
k= 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3

0.1

0.2 0.1 0.05

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000769.vsd

Figure 376:

Very inverse

768

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

RED 670

Section 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=

0.1

1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.2

0.01

10

0.1 0.05

100

I/I>

xx05000770.vsd

Figure 377:

Extremely inverse

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

769

770

Section 22 Glossary

Section 22 Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

22.1

Glossary
AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool 771

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 22 Glossary

CB CBM CCITT

Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler RED 670

CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CO cycle Co-directional

COMTRADE Contra-directional

CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH 772

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 22 Glossary

DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703

Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance

GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

773

Section 22 Glossary

IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1

Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device RED 670

IED I-GIS IOM Instance

IP

IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD 774

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 22 Glossary

LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach

Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX 775

PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 22 Glossary

RCA REVAL RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector SMS SNTP

Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD RED 670

SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP 776

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

Section 22 Glossary

Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

U/I-PISA UTC

UV WEI VT X.21 3IO 3UO

RED 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK505132-UEN rev. D

777

778

You might also like